TeleForm 10.5 Adminstration Guide

March 26, 2018 | Author: nalz | Category: Installation (Computer Programs), World Wide Web, Technology, Share Point, Login


Comments



Description

TeleForm™ TeleForm Administration Guide Version 10.5 Document Revision 0 04 November 2011 Copyright Notice Notice This documentation is a proprietary product of Autonomy and is protected by copyright laws and international treaty. Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Autonomy. While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein, Autonomy assumes no liability for errors or omissions. No liability is assumed for direct, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this documentation. The copyrighted software that accompanies this documentation is licensed to the End User for use only in strict accordance with the End User License Agreement, which the Licensee should read carefully before commencing use of the software. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, nor translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner. This documentation may use fictitious names for purposes of demonstration; references to actual persons, companies, or organizations are strictly coincidental. Trademarks and Copyrights Copyright 2010 Autonomy Corporation plc and all its affiliates. All rights reserved. ACI API, Alfresco Connector, Arcpliance, Autonomy Process Automation, Autonomy Fetch for Siebel eBusiness Applications, Autonomy, Business Objects Connector, Cognos Connector, Confluence Connector, ControlPoint, DAH, Digital Safe Connector, DIH, DiSH, DLH, Documentum Connector, DOH, EAS Connector, Ektron Connector, Enterprise AWE, eRoom Connector, Exchange Connector, FatWire Connector, File System Connector for Netware, File System Connector, FileNet Connector, FileNet P8 Connector, FTP Fetch, HTTP Connector, Hummingbird DM Connector, IAS, IBM Content Manager Connector, IBM Seedlist Connector, IBM Workplace Fetch, IDOL Server, IDOL, IDOLme, iManage Fetch, IMAP Connector, Import Module, iPlanet Connector, KeyView, KVS Connector, Legato Connector, LiquidOffice, LiquidPDF, LiveLink Web Content Management Connector, MCMS Connector, MediClaim, Meridio Connector, Meridio, Moreover Fetch, NNTP Connector, Notes Connector, Objective Connector, OCS Connector, ODBC Connector, Omni Fetch SDK, Open Text Connector, Oracle Connector, PCDocs Fetch, PLC Connector, POP3 Fetch, Portal-in-a-Box, RecoFlex, Retina, SAP Fetch, Schlumberger Fetch, SharePoint 2003 Connector, SharePoint 2007 Connector, SharePoint 2010 Connector, SharePoint Fetch, SpeechPlugin, Stellent Fetch, TeleForm, Tri-CR, Ultraseek, Verity Profiler, Verity, VersiForm, WebDAV Connector, WorkSite Connector, and all related titles and logos are trademarks of Autonomy Corporation plc and its affiliates, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Microsoft is a registered trademark, and MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, Windows NT, SharePoint, and other Microsoft products referenced herein are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. AvantGo is a trademark of AvantGo, Inc. Epicentric Foundation Server is a trademark of Epicentric, Inc. Documentum and eRoom are trademarks of Documentum, a division of EMC Corp. FileNet is a trademark of FileNet Corporation. Lotus Notes is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation. mySAP Enterprise Portal is a trademark of SAP AG. Oracle is a trademark of Oracle Corporation. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Novell is a trademark of Novell, Inc. Stellent is a trademark of Stellent, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Notice to Government End Users If this product is acquired under the terms of a DoD contract: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of 252.227-7013. Civilian agency contract: Use, reproduction or disclosure is subject to 52.227-19 (a) through (d) and restrictions set forth in the accompanying end user agreement. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Autonomy, Inc., One Market Plaza, Spear Tower, Suite 1900, San Francisco, CA. 94105, US. 04 November 2011 Contents Procedures ....................................................................................................................................19 Preface ............................................................................................................................................23 Documentation Updates...............................................................................................................23 Conventions .................................................................................................................................23 Notational Conventions .........................................................................................................24 Command-line Syntax Conventions ......................................................................................25 Notices ..................................................................................................................................26 Related Documentation................................................................................................................26 Autonomy Product References ....................................................................................................26 Autonomy Customer Support .......................................................................................................27 Contact Autonomy........................................................................................................................27 Part 1 Getting Started Chapter 1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 31 TeleForm Product Suite ...............................................................................................................31 Autonomy’s IDOL Platform...........................................................................................................32 TeleForm Architecture..................................................................................................................32 TeleForm Components.................................................................................................................33 TeleForm Designer ...............................................................................................................33 TeleForm IDR Designer ........................................................................................................34 TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher ............................................................................................34 TeleForm Scan Station .........................................................................................................34 TeleForm Reader ..................................................................................................................34 TeleForm Verifier ..................................................................................................................34 TeleForm Control Center ......................................................................................................34 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 3 • • • Contents TeleForm Utilities ................................................................................................................. 35 TeleForm Tiers ............................................................................................................................ 36 TeleForm Desktop ................................................................................................................ 36 TeleForm Workgroup ........................................................................................................... 37 TeleForm Enterprise ............................................................................................................ 37 Chapter 2  Prepare for Installation ........................................................................................................... 39 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 40 System Requirements ................................................................................................................. 40 OS and Hardware Wizards ................................................................................................... 41 VMWare Support .................................................................................................................. 41 Server Hardware .................................................................................................................. 42 Domain Controllers ........................................................................................................ 42 Web Server for Web Capture Option ............................................................................. 42 Workstation Hardware .......................................................................................................... 43 Workstation Limits ......................................................................................................... 43 Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services ....................................................... 44 Remote Capture Station Workstations ........................................................................... 44 Web Capture Option Workstations ................................................................................. 45 Network Requirements ......................................................................................................... 45 Network Protocols .......................................................................................................... 46 LDAP ............................................................................................................................. 46 MS SQL Database....................................................................................................................... 46 Non-TeleForm Software Installation ............................................................................................ 46 Installation Permissions and Operating Rights ............................................................................ 47 Mapped Drives and UNC Paths................................................................................................... 47 Software Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 48 Microsoft Office 2007 ........................................................................................................... 48 Chapter 3  Install TeleForm ......................................................................................................................... 49 Preliminary Steps ........................................................................................................................ 49 Other Installation Instructions ...................................................................................................... 50 Remote Capture and Web Capture Options .................................................................. 50 Connect Agents ............................................................................................................. 50 Intelligent Classification Server ...................................................................................... 50 Create Windows Users for TeleForm........................................................................................... 50 Create Windows Administrator ............................................................................................. 51 • • 4 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Contents Create TeleForm Users ........................................................................................................51 Create a TeleForm User Group ............................................................................................51 Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory ..............................................................................................51 Install TeleForm to the Server ......................................................................................................53 Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server ........................................................................53 Mapped Drives ...............................................................................................................53 UNC Paths .....................................................................................................................54 Update Files During Install ....................................................................................................54 Run the Setup Program ........................................................................................................54 Fax Server and Scanners.............................................................................................................56 Fax Server ............................................................................................................................57 Scanner ................................................................................................................................57 Install Workstations ......................................................................................................................57 Activation .....................................................................................................................................59 Identification Information ..............................................................................................................59 License Code .................................................................................................................60 Machine ID .....................................................................................................................60 Activation Code ..............................................................................................................60 Activation Process ................................................................................................................60 Restore Activation .................................................................................................................60 Chapter 4  Upgrade and Migrate ................................................................................................................ 61 Upgrade Versus Migrate ..............................................................................................................61 Upgrade TeleForm .......................................................................................................................62 Check Your Current Version .................................................................................................62 Check Your System Requirements .......................................................................................63 Stop TeleForm Processing ...................................................................................................63 Back Up Data ........................................................................................................................63 Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server .......................................................64 Install TeleForm Workstations ..............................................................................................64 Migrate TeleForm.........................................................................................................................65 Install TeleForm Server .........................................................................................................65 Install One TeleForm Workstation .........................................................................................65 Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System ...................................................................66 Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations .............................................................................67 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 5 • • • Contents Chapter 5  Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems......................................................... 69 Configured Per Module................................................................................................................ 70 TeleForm System dialog box ....................................................................................................... 70 Add a TeleForm System ....................................................................................................... 71 Batch Routing .............................................................................................................................. 72 Chapter 6  Manage Licenses ...................................................................................................................... 75 Introduction to License Codes ..................................................................................................... 75 Licensed Modules ................................................................................................................ 76 Unlicensed Modules ............................................................................................................. 76 Licensed Options ................................................................................................................. 76 Using License Manager ............................................................................................................... 76 View License Information ..................................................................................................... 76 View License Specifics ......................................................................................................... 77 Delete a License .................................................................................................................. 77 Add a New License Code ..................................................................................................... 78 Chapter 7  TeleForm Remote Verification ............................................................................................. 79 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 79 System Requirements ................................................................................................................. 80 Installation Process ..................................................................................................................... 80 Install Software Prerequisites ............................................................................................... 81 Log Off Users ....................................................................................................................... 81 Install TeleForm to XenApp Server ...................................................................................... 81 Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp........................................................................................... 82 Administration ............................................................................................................................. 83 Citrix Delivery Services Console .......................................................................................... 83 Confirm the Session Station Name ...................................................................................... 83 Use TeleForm Control Center to Delete Stations ................................................................. 84 TeleForm License Errors ...................................................................................................... 84 Chapter 8  Security ......................................................................................................................................... 85 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 85 Enterprise Security Options .................................................................................................. 86 Purpose of Security ..................................................................................................................... 86 • • 6 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Contents Security Rights .............................................................................................................................87 Available Security Rights ......................................................................................................87 Form & Image Access ....................................................................................................88 Verify (Basic) ..................................................................................................................88 Verify (Advanced) ...........................................................................................................88 Verify (QC) .....................................................................................................................89 Evaluate .........................................................................................................................89 Design ............................................................................................................................89 Scan ...............................................................................................................................90 Utilities ............................................................................................................................90 Administration .................................................................................................................90 Group Rights and Individual Rights .......................................................................................91 Rights Structure ..............................................................................................................91 Individual Rights .............................................................................................................91 Group Rights ..................................................................................................................92 Enable Security ............................................................................................................................92 Security Providers .................................................................................................................93 Internal ...........................................................................................................................94 LDAP ..............................................................................................................................94 Windows .........................................................................................................................95 Single Sign-on ......................................................................................................................95 Create a New User.......................................................................................................................96 Internal Security ....................................................................................................................96 External Security ...................................................................................................................98 Configure Users ...........................................................................................................................99 Manually Configure a User ...................................................................................................99 Copy User Settings .............................................................................................................101 Settings Available for Copying ......................................................................................102 Change User Info ................................................................................................................103 Change Password ..............................................................................................................104 Delete Users .......................................................................................................................105 Security Groups .........................................................................................................................106 Batch Security, Not Source Security ...................................................................................106 Pre-Defined Security Groups ..............................................................................................107 Create a Security Group .....................................................................................................108 Add Users to a Security Group .....................................................................................110 Log In ......................................................................................................................................... 111 Log on to a Current Session ............................................................................................... 111 Change Logon Passwords ..................................................................................................112 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 7 • • • .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 Lock timeout ....................... 113 External to External ...................................................................... 121 Global System > Security Tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 114 Part 2 TeleForm Customization Chapter 9  Change the System Configuration ................................ 121 Enable user security ........... 125 Minimum VARCHAR length ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 123 Image zone format .................................................................. 122 JPEG Compression Quality ............................................................................................. 123 Backup directory .......................................................... 118 Global System Tab .......................................................Contents Log Off ................................................................................................................ 120 Collect Verifier Statistics .................................................................... 113 Internal to External ................. 125 • • 8 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide ................................................... 124 Treat PDF as color .............................................. 122 Remember last login ............................................................................................................................................................ 124 Resolution ................................. 120 Stall time ............................................................................................................ 124 Maximum field name length ............................... 124 Global System > Export Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 122 Internal storage format ................................................................................................................................................... 117 Open the Configuration controls ............................................ 122 Global System > Image Storage Tab ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 125 Choice field separator .................................................................... 119 Minimal tracking ............. 123 NonForm image directory .......................... 112 Switch Security Providers .............. 122 Single sign-on .......................................... 113 External to Internal ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 118 Global System > General Tab ......................................................................................... 119 Default Language ...................................................................................................... 120 WYSIWYG Text Options .............................................................................................................................................. 124 Export/Commit retries ............ 123 Save without processing .................................... 122 Provider .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................................134 Reader > Local Tab ......................................................................................131 Spell Checking Options ....................................................Contents Don't allow a batch to be committed until it is in the 'Ready to be committed' state .........................128 Local System tab...............128 Disk level .................128 Memory level .........................137 Existing/VersiForm confidence ....................................................136 Display All Evaluation Zones .........................................125 Global System > Read Only Tab .....................................................................................................................129 Designer Tab ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ....................................125 Global System > Resource Checker Tab ..................................138 Check for Flipped Forms .....................................................................................................................................................................................................128 Retry ...........................................................................................130 Create a “New” form at startup ..................137 Limit ............................................................................125 When mapping fields.......................................................................139 Use Drop-In identification ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................135 Tasks .....130 Show full grid .................140 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 9 • • • ............131 Show Form ID and state in title ................................................................................................................................................132 Form ID Assignment ..130 Sticky cursors ..........................................................................................131 Master selection color ..........................................................................131 Group selection color ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................139 Evaluate all forms as ................................130 Designer > Local Tab ....................................................... only allow compatible types .....................................................................................................139 Enable NCS style forms ................................................................................................................................................126 Option ...........................................................................................................133 Reader Tab .............................................................................140 Evaluate NonForms as ...................136 Reader > Identification Tab .................................................................................................................................................................132 Designer > Advanced Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................135 Load Engines at Startup...............................................................................................................................................................131 Spell check language .132 Selection handle size .....................................................................................................................136 Do evaluations in background thread .127 Check every _ seconds ...........133 Designer > Defaults Tab .......................131 Existing form background color .................. ..................................... 140 Character Recognition .................... 150 Enable print and send ............................... 146 Only link forms with page link and/or user ID fields ................................................................................................ 147 Reader > General Tab .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 146 NonForm image handling .... 153 Cache the auto-assign queue ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 149 Merge/Print Tab....................................................................................... 141 Skip blank constrained print fields and image zones ............................................................................................................. 151 Batch merging ........ 146 Print forms with missing pages ........... 151 Multiuser Features > General Tab .... 153 Enable script caching .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 153 Auto-assign queue refresh ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 143 Location lattice use ............................................................................................................................... 142 Low confidence character ................. 149 Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate) .......... 145 Only link pages that are in same image or scan ............................................. 153 Maximum users per batch .................................. 150 High speed merge ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RES file ......... 143 Reader > OCR Performance tab ................................................................ 148 Collect Reader statistics ................................................................................. 143 Mark all forms for review ...................... 146 Save unattached .......... 142 OMR Recognition .................................Contents Reader > Recognition tab ........................................................................... 147 Print if not attached ..................................... 153 Compress ....................................................................... 148 Collect NonForm identification information ................................................... 144 Reader > Image Handling tab .................... 150 Enable merges ................ 142 Disable single line extraction ................................................................................................................................................ 153 • • 10 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide ............................................................................................................................................................................ 149 Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue (if supported) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 144 Page link rule ......... 150 Priority based queuing .................................................................................. 149 Evaluation override format ............................. 152 Single Reader per batch ..................................................................................... 148 Form ................................. 151 Multiuser Features Tab................. 148 Collect Reader field statistics ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................................164 Right Justify Numerics ..................................................................................................164 Chapter 10  Remote Capture Option .....................................................................................................153 Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab .............................................................................................157 Report Settings .......................................................................................159 Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab ..................160 Configuration Options tab............................156 Audit Log Settings ..........................................................................................................................163 Enable BasicScript Editor ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................164 Generate Wallpaper Resolution ...........................................167 Remote batch directory .................168 Synchronization directory .....................168 Configuration Steps...................154 Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................163 Disable Background Form Loads .......................163 Enable scripts ........................................................................................................................................................................156 Multiuser Features > Compliance Support ............................................169 Add a Remote Capture Station License ..................157 Multiuser Features > Encryption .................................................................................................................................164 Capture Entry Font Name ....................................................................................163 Explicit ID Performance .............................................................................................................................. 167 Important Remote Capture Station Concepts.....................170 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 11 • • • ...157 Synching Live and Offline Databases ..........................................................................................................................................................................162 Clear And Key Virtuals ............................................................................155 Diagnostic Logging .............................Contents Do ALL non-batch exports from Reader ...............................168 DSS Files .........................164 Verifier Preloads ....................................................................................................156 Security Settings .....................................................154 SQL Cluster Support .................................................168 Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm ...................................................................................................................................155 File Server Cluster Support .......................................................................164 Hide Default Job ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................159 Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab .............................................164 Stacked Config Pages .............................................................158 Image zone output ..........................................162 Batch Auto Assign Skip Flags ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................163 Form Selection Config Override ................................................. ........................................................0 / FIPS Requirement .................................................................................................................. 186 Install the Web Capture Server ................................... 192 Install the Web Capture Client ................................................................ 194 Manage the Web Capture Option ........................................................................ 195 Web Settings Tab .......................... 181 DSS Files ................................................ 179 Web Capture Stations and TeleForm ............... 198 License Info Page ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 173 Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent ..................................... 181 Web capture directory ............ 184 Install the Web Capture Server.................................. 180 Concurrent Users ................................................................................... 196 Job Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 183 Synchronization directory ..... 177 Chapter 11  Web Capture Option ................ 177 Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations ........................................ 200 • • 12 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide ...... 174 Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings .......................... 189 Choose Reader Stations .... 190 Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent ...................................................................................................................................... 186 Net 2................................ 196 Web Capture Server Administration ................................................................................................... 183 Firewall ......................................................................................................................................................... 187 Create Directories ......................................... 172 Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 191 Configure Synchronization Directory ..................................................................................... 171 Synchronization Directory Setup .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199 Session Info Page .............................Contents Define Your Connection Protocol ............................................................................................... 188 Configure The Web Capture Server ........................................................... 185 Older Files ............................................................................................................................................................. 194 Limit Web Capture Job Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 181 Data Transfer Methods ............................................................................................ 197 Configuration Settings Page ............................................................................................................. 194 Synchronize Job Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 170 Create Directories ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 179 Web Capture Concepts ................................................................................................ ......................Contents Chapter 12  Customize Verifier for Your Operators...........215 General Options Tab ................................................................................................................................................................................225 Global Configuration of Services ..............................213 Appearance Tab ................................................................................................... 203 Access Configuration Controls ...............................................................................................................................................................................................211 Image Positioning Tab ....... 223 License Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................................................220 Part 3 TeleForm Maintenance Chapter 13  Run and Manage TeleForm ...........................................................................................................207 Form Mode Options ...................................................................................................................................................................................225 User Interface .................................................................................................................................................................................229 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 13 • • • .....................................................228 Customize Your Control Center window .................................................................................209 Correction Options Tab ...............210 Appearance Tab .............................................................224 Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services ......................................................................................................................................227 Control Center Branches ..................................225 Configure Services .................................................................................................................................219 Restore Default Character Exclusion Settings .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................212 Field Mode Options ..........................223 Run Modules ................................206 Keyboard Options .............................................................................................................214 Character Mode Options ..................................................................................................................................................................204 Correction Options ..................212 Image Positioning .......................................................................................................225 Control Center.............................................206 Field Character Threshold Options .....................................................................................212 Default Image Scaling .......................................217 Add Extended Characters ...................................................................................223 TeleForm License Service .............................................................................217 Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode .....................................................................................................................................................228 Outline of the Control Center Tree ....................................................................213 General Options Tab ................................................................215 Appearance Tab .........................................................................................224 System Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................... 234 Verifier Statistic Collection .............................................................................................. 248 Bad Images ................................................................................................................................... 253 Scheduled Purges ...................................................................................................................... 240 Global Settings ................................................................................... 255 Archive Images..................................................... 246 Start TeleForm Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 253 Purge Events ............................................................................................................................................................ 256 Delete Old Image Zone Files ..............................................................................................................Contents Graph Colors ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 244 Log on to Control Center ......................................................... 257 • • 14 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide ......... 235 Alerts .................................................................................... 251 General Maintenance Tips....................... 248 Bad Evaluations ........ 236 Alerts in Control Center .................................................................................................................................................. 242 User Settings ...... 243 Batch Control ............................................................................................................................... 251 Run Windows Utilities ............................. 246 TeleForm Monitor Overview ................................................................................................................................. 254 Stored Images ................................................................................................................................. 249 Chapter 14  Maintain System Performance ........................................... 239 Configure TeleForm with Control Center .. 231 Recommended Statistic Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 255 Use Database Utilities .................. 252 Use the Purge Log.. 237 E-Mail Alert Setup ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 252 Manual Purge With the Purge Log ............................................ 230 Workflow Analysis ............................. 232 Reader Statistic Collection ............................... 244 Use Control Center to Resolve Inefficiency .............................. 245 TeleForm Monitor ................................................................. 232 Statistics Parameters ......................... 241 Station Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 255 Other Events ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 246 Monitor Active Tasks ............................ 236 Email Alerts ............................................................................................. 254 Completed Tracking Records ........................................................ 247 Monitor Queued Images ........................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................................................266 Revision Control in the Shape Library .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................275 Remove forms and library files from revision control ..................278 Form Statistics .........................................................................................................................................................................................................264 Precautionary Notes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................280 Verifiers ................................................................................ 277 Overview ..............269 Previously Removed Files ......................... 259 Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................286 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 15 • • • ......................279 Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level ..................................271 Check in .....................................................................................................................................................................................270 Check out .............................................................................................................................................................279 General Procedure for Analyzing Form Design .............280 Viewing Evaluation Statistics for Your Forms .....................................................271 Difference ................270 Undo check out ......................................................268 Revision Control Tasks ..............................273 Remove from Revision Control ..................................................................275 Chapter 16  Analyze Form Design ........................................................................................260 Configure SourceSafe ................260 Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe ..............................................273 Validate Command ..............................................................................................................282 Verifier Charts .........................................................................................................................................................283 View Verification Statistics for Your Form ....................................................................Contents Chapter 15  Revision Control ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................280 Readers ................................................................................266 Revision Control in Designer ....................................................................261 Enable TeleForm Security ......................................................................................................................................................................................272 History ..................................................................................................................................................281 Reader Chart ..............................................................................266 Use Revision Control in TeleForm.......................................................................268 Add Items to Revision Control ...............275 Remove Folders from Revision Control ..................................269 Add form folders to revision control .....................................................................272 Validate Files .................................................................................................................................................................262 Revision Control Tasks .............................................................................261 Configure TeleForm ..... .............................................................. 336 • • 16 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 290 Form Detail Report ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 334 Cluster Server Monitoring .................................. 318 Verifier Productivity Charts ........................................................... 326 Form Detail Report ....... 310 View Batch Chart ........................................... 289 Form Correction Summary Report ....................................... 333 Hardware Components...................................... 287 Generate Form Reports ......................... 300 Analyze Throughput on an Application Level................................................................. 295 Overview of Throughput Analysis ............................................................................Contents Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level....................................................................................................................... 296 Analyze Throughput on a Global Level ..................................................................................... 296 General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput...... 314 Crystal Reports Controls ................................................................................ 329 Part 4 TeleForm Enterprise Chapter 18  Redundancy and High Availability Settings ....................................................................................................... 297 View Your Global Statistics .............................................. 303 Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level ............................................................................................................... 287 View Current Workload Statistics for Your Form ....................................... 313 Available Reports .............................................................. 292 Chapter 17  Analyze Your System Throughput ................................................................................................................................................. 308 Available Workload Statistics ........................................................................... 309 View Batch Statistics .............................................................................................................. 301 View Your Reader Station Statistics ................................................................................................................................................................. 301 View Verifier Statistics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 316 User Performance Report................................................................................................................. 311 Generate System Throughput Reports ................. 298 View Your License Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 324 Form Correction Summary Report................................................................... 321 Batch Summary Report ..................... 328 Reader Usage Chart............ 315 System Performance Report ........................................................................................................................................... 323 Form Evaluation Summary Report................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ...........338 Cluster Server for File Servers ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................341 Warning Messages and Alerts ............. 343 Double Key Data Entry.....................................................................................354 Appendixes Glossary .............................................................................................................................................................................................................344 Enable Double Key Validation ................................................................................344 Set up Double Key Validation for a Field ...................................................................................................................................336 Failure Notification for Cluster Servers ............371 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 17 • • • .............................................................................................................................................................347 Set Up Form Folder Security ...........................359 Index .........................353 Data Warehouse/Off-line Database ...................................341 Restart the License Service ................339 Redundant License Service ......................350 Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging ..............348 Set Up Windows Security .............................................................................................................345 Process Batches With Double Key Validation ..349 Enable Account Impersonation .............................................................................................338 Enable Server Cluster Support ....................................Contents Failover Process ........................................341 Chapter 19  Regulatory Compliance ......................................................................................................................................................352 Audit Logging Level ........................................346 Compliance Security ................................................337 Cluster Server for MS SQL .341 Transfer the License Service to a Different Machine ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................352 Digital Signature ............................................................................................................................................................................. Contents • • 18 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . ......................................... 80 To install TeleForm to the XenApp server ........................................................................... 101 To change user information........................................................................... 83 To enable security .................................. 103 To change the password of a user ........................................... 82 To determine your current session name ................... 105 To set up security in the example manufacturing business.................................110 To log on to a current session .................................................................................................................................114 To open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box. 98 To manually configure a user .......................................................................................................................................112 To switch from Windows to LDAP or from LDAP to Windows.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 77 To delete a TeleForm license .......... 107 To create a new group...................................................................................................................................................................................5 from an older TeleForm system.............................. 65 To add a TeleForm system .............................................................................................................................................................................. 81 To upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp .......................112 To log off TeleForm....... 104 To delete a user................................................................................................................................................... 96 To create a new user with external security ...............................................................................................................................Procedures To use the online requirements wizard........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 To copy user settings ............................ 108 To add users to a security group ...................................................................................................................................................118 To create a directory for the TeleForm Remote Capture Station .................................................................. 171 To configure directory synchronization................................................................................................................................. 51 To install TeleForm on workstations ............................................................................... 57 To migrate to TeleForm 10......... 92 To create a new user with internal security ............... 41 To create a Windows Administrator for TeleForm ....................................................................................................................... 78 To find the online wizard..................... 51 To create a TeleForm user group .......................................................................................... 77 To view the details of a license....................................................................................................................................................................................... 71 To view your license information ..................................................... 172 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • • 19 • • ......................................................................................... ............................................................................239 To view a user’s settings.......................................................................................................................................................................243 To perform an action on a batch ................................................................................................................................................209 To change Field Mode options................................................249 To open the purge log.......................................................................................................................................................................Net and ............213 To change Character Mode options...........................................................244 To diagnose inefficiency between your Verifier operators and Reader stations......................................................................................................246 To remove a bad image .............................................................................................174 To use ASP.............193 To install the Web Capture Client ............................................................................................... .............................................................253 To create a purge schedule .................................................186 To install Web Capture Server .................................................................................204 To assign a New Keystroke to a Command......................191 To configure the synchronization directory .............................254 To archive forms ............................232 To change which statistics are collected from TeleForm Reader...............................196 To include a job in the Web Capture Service........................................220 To start the TeleForm License Service........................................................................245 To run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center...........................................................215 To add or remove characters from the default Look-Alike settings.........................................................................................................................................0 with Web Capture Server ..........................................187 To create the required installation directories ...............209 To modify the behavior and appearance of Verifier during Form Mode correction .......................................209 To restore Default Keystroke Assignments...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................200 To access the Verifier configuration of an operator ............................188 To configure the Web Capture Connect Agent .........................................................................224 To configure the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader services ................................................................................................................199 To reset a license..........................207 To remove a Keystroke Assignment ...................................................196 To add a Web Capture Option license ....................................................Procedures To configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent ...........................................................244 To log on as a different user while TeleForm Control Center is open .................194 To select the Job Settings available to Web Capture Clients .....................218 To restore the default character exclusion settings ....................................................................................................................................235 To specify the conditions of Control Center alert messages..230 To set the statistics parameters .............................225 To change the graph colors .............................................................................................................................................................................................................224 To launch a module .......237 To set up e-mail delivery ....................................236 To set Alert Properties for a given event..............................................................256 • • 20 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .........................................................................................................NET 2..................................................................................................................234 To collect Verifier statistics........................................ ..... 344 To enable double key validation .............................. 348 To set up Network Security for TeleForm Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 338 To enable server cluster support in TeleForm ........................................................................ 339 To restart the TeleForm License Service...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 260 To add network logon names to SourceSafe ............................................................................................................................... 267 To check in forms ....................................................................................... 262 To access the revision control commands in Designer ................ 346 To set up form folder security ........................................................................ 314 To install MS SQL to a cluster server ..................... 341 To use Double Key data entry ......................................................................................................................................... 352 To set up reporting with Report Generator ................................Procedures To review archived images........................................................ 345 To enable Data Review ......................... 271 To trigger the Validate Files command ..................................................... 354 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 21 • • • ............................................................................................................................................................ 344 To set up double key validation ........................................................................................................................................... 261 To link SourceSafe to TeleForm ...................................................................................................................................................... 349 To notify your users that their actions are logged......... 256 To configure TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe......... 275 To generate a report in TeleForm Control Center.................................................................................... Procedures • • 22 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . version 7. Conventions The following conventions are used in this document. revision 3). The version number applies to the product that the document describes.Preface This guide is for users who must manage a TeleForm WorkGroup or Enterprise installation. The content was last modified 04 November 2011 . The revision number applies to the document.com A document in the Knowledge Base has a version number (for example. You can retrieve the latest available product documentation from Autonomy’s Knowledge Base on the Customer Support Site: https://customers.autonomy. The Knowledge Base contains the latest available revision of any document.  Documentation Updates  Conventions  Related Documentation  Autonomy Product References  Autonomy Customer Support  Contact Autonomy Documentation Updates The information in this guide is current as of TeleForm version 10. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 23 • • • .5) and may also have a revision number (for example.5. For example:  For more information. For example: user UserName • • 24 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . monospace bold monospace italics Data typed by the user.  In the User Name field. sent to IDOL Server. and code. see the IDOL Server Administration Guide. Replaceable strings in file paths and code. type Admin.  An action command is a request. Italics Document titles and new terms.Preface Notational Conventions This guide uses the following conventions. monospace font File names. For example: The FileSystemConnector. For example:  Type run at the command prompt. paths. For example: Click Cancel to halt the operation.cfg file is installed in C:\Autonomy\FileSystemConnector\. such as a query or indexing instruction. Convention Usage Bold User-interface elements such as a menu item or button. Convention Usage [ optional ] Brackets describe optional syntax. ] where the ellipses specify. it is not part of the syntax definition. you must type the required syntax element. and so on. or both options.Conventions Command-line Syntax Conventions This guide uses the following command-line syntax conventions. variable Italics specify items to be replaced by actual values. commas. The use of punctuation—such as single and double quotes. required Absence of braces or brackets indicates required syntax in which there is no choice. For example: [ option1 ] | [ option2 ] In this example. Ellipses indicate repetition of the same pattern. you must choose option1. For example: -merge filename1. For example: { [ option1 ] [ option2 ] } In this example. you must choose between option1 and option2.) . { required } Braces describe required syntax in which you have a choice and that at least one choice is required. filename4.. periods— indicates actual syntax... filename3 . For example: <variable> -merge filename1 (In some documents. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 25 • • • . filename2 [.. option2. For example: [ -create ] | Bars indicate “either | or” choices. angle brackets are used to denote these items. A note supplies information that may apply only in special cases—for example. or details that apply to specific versions of the software. NOTE A note provides information that emphasizes or supplements important points of the main text.Preface Notices This guide uses the following notices: CAUTION A caution indicates an action can result in the loss of data. memory limitations. equipment configurations. TIP A tip provides additional information that makes a task easier or more productive. Related Documentation The following documents provide more details on TeleForm:  Autonomy Product References This document references the following Autonomy products:   • • 26 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . IMPORTANT An important note provides information that is essential to completing a task. autonomy.  Download Center: Products and product updates can be downloaded and requested from the Download Center. contact one of the following locations: Europe and Worldwide North and South America E-mail: autonomy@autonomy. CB4 0WZ.html Contact Autonomy For general information about Autonomy. To access the Customer Support Site. expertise-based service by Autonomy support engineers. Suite 1900 San Francisco.com Telephone: +44 (0) 1223 448 000 Fax: +44 (0) 1223 448 001 Telephone: 1 415 243 9955 Fax: 1 415 243 9984 Autonomy Corporation plc Cambridge Business Park Cowley Road.en. and manage all your cases that are open with technical support.autonomy. 94105. go to https://customers.com/content/Services/Support/index. go to http://www.Autonomy Customer Support Autonomy Customer Support Autonomy Customer Support provides prompt and accurate support to help you quickly and effectively resolve any issue you may encounter while using Autonomy products. To contact Autonomy Customer Support by e-mail or phone.com E-mail: autonomy@autonomy. monitor. FAQs.  Case Center: The Case Center is a central location to create. US TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 27 • • • . and software maintenance to ensure you have the most up-to-date technology. Inc. Spear Tower. and technical articles that is easy to navigate and search.  Resource Center: Other helpful resources appropriate for your product. UK Autonomy. CA. Cambridge.com The Customer Support Site includes:  Knowledge Base: The CSS contains an extensive library of end user documentation. One Market Plaza. Support services include access to the Customer Support Site (CSS) for online answers. Preface • • 28 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Describes the available security features. It includes the following chapters:  “Introduction” on page 31. and network requirements for running TeleForm. Outlines the server. Provides instructions on running TeleForm through Citrix XenApp.  “Upgrade and Migrate” on page 61.  “Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems” on page 69. A brief introduction to the TeleForm system.  “Security” on page 85. As your system changes. you may need to add new licenses to support more workstations.  “TeleForm Remote Verification” on page 79. .  “Install TeleForm” on page 49.  “Prepare for Installation” on page 39. Instructions on setting up the TeleForm software.PART 1 Getting Started This section provides information for getting started with TeleForm WorkGroup and TeleForm Enterprise. Information and instructions for upgrading or migrating your TeleForm installation.  “Manage Licenses” on page 75. Describes how to connect individual TeleForm modules to multiple TeleForm servers. workstation. Part 1 Getting Started • • 30 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . simple forms or complex sets. dependable environment. and search the process behind the form giving you maximum efficiency and ensuring compliance to organization and government regulation.5 enables you to:  Automatically capture and index any form or document type TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 31 • • • . Whether you process loan applications or clinical information.5 provides an easy-to-use. Introduction CHAPTER 1 This chapter describes TeleForm and its components. audit. scalable platform that equips your organization to capture data from most any source in a secure. It includes the following topics:  TeleForm Product Suite  Autonomy’s IDOL Platform  TeleForm Architecture  TeleForm Components  TeleForm Tiers TeleForm Product Suite TeleForm offers the capability to capture unstructured as well as semi-structured data. TeleForm version 10. TeleForm version 10. and then to track. IDOL gathers and processes unstructured. and personalization to an application that integrates the technology. linking disparate data sources together based on the concepts contained within them. This architecture means that workstations connected to the Server are set up to run TeleForm applications from the server. The following diagram illustrates a typical TeleForm Workgroup system: • • 32 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . IDOL can automatically link concepts contained in an e-mail message to a recorded phone conversation. It can automatically form a contextual understanding of the information in real time. For example. the system administrator can modify configuration settings to create a custom-made capture processing system. TeleForm Architecture With TeleForm.Chapter 1 Introduction  Easily and rapidly fold information from paper into electronically-based workflows from both distributed and centralized locations  Embed intelligence within the form to navigate the business process  Enforce internal and external regulatory compliance requirements  Increase productivity across a disparate. Within this environment. semi-structured. which can be associated with a stock trade. Autonomy’s IDOL Platform TeleForm integrates with Autonomy’s Intelligent Data Operating Layer (IDOL). adding advanced retrieval. refer to the IDOL Getting Started Guide. global enterprise  With the addition of Citrix Metaframe. and structured information in any format from multiple repositories using IDOL connectors and a global relational index. you can also use the TeleForm Designer and Verifier remotely. collaboration. individual Clients (workstations) communicate with the Server in a Client/Server environment. For more information on IDOL. This information is then imported into a format that is easily searchable. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 33 • • • . Toolbar buttons let you add fields and drawing objects with a click of the mouse.TeleForm Components TeleForm Components TeleForm includes the following components: TeleForm Designer TeleForm Designer’s drag-and-drop interface make it easy to create templates to collect any type of data. Special dialog boxes enable you to add business rules. You can also add logos and artwork created in other graphics programs. eliminating the need for manual sorting. TeleForm Scan Station TeleForm’s Scan Station turns completed pages and files into batches that can be processed by Reader and Verifier. and e-mail.0. TeleForm Reader classifies and evaluates image files by comparing them to templates created in Designer. TeleForm IDR Designer allows you to produce XML templates without using XML code. while maintaining the ability to merge customized information onto documents and distribute them by print. the AutoMerge Publisher took on the routine print and fax functions previously served by TeleForm Print Manager. which handles large groups of items efficiently and accurately. and collect information in Capture Zones. fax. Statistics in the System branch can be used to manage the throughput of files and identify bottlenecks in the TeleForm system. TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher The AutoMerge Publisher is the built-in distribution module for TeleForm. TeleForm Reader TeleForm Reader evaluates image files automatically. The Workload branch contains global statistics that apply to the TeleForm system as a whole. The TeleForm IDR Designer provides a graphical interface for creating the IDR templates to use to classify scanned documents and extract information from those documents based on the location of content and content-based rules. TeleForm Control Center TeleForm Control Center allows provides an overview of the working of your entire TeleForm system. perform Quality Control on batches. • • 34 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Beginning with TeleForm 9. TeleForm Verifier TeleForm Verifier allows users to check or correct any data entry fields that were not evaluated with sufficient confidence by TeleForm Reader. Using Scan Station is the first step in taking advantage of TeleForm’s powerful batch processing feature.Chapter 1 Introduction TeleForm IDR Designer IDR is the process of classifying documents (defined as one or more related images or pages) into categories and extracting values that can vary by location. resume. The TeleForm License Manager allows you to manage the licenses for your TeleForm installations and workstations.  TeleForm License Manager. NOTE The TeleForm Service Monitor Service and Application are available only for TeleForm Enterprise. You can also delete a number of temporary files by using the same utility. TeleForm Monitor tracks the TeleForm applications on workstations that make up the Workgroup or Enterprise system. the Report Generator offers an Audit Trail report for compliance tracking and the ability to save customized reports and run them as often as needed. You can filter the list of services by server or application name and can start. Compared to the TeleForm Stats function used by Desktop and Workgroup. The TeleForm Service Monitor Application allows you to monitor the status of all active TeleForm services.TeleForm Components You can customize the global. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 35 • • • . and reading forms.  TeleForm Report Generator. Using these utilities ensures that databases and associated files are synchronized. The utilities include:  TeleForm Database Utilities. You can also set alerts that appear when an administrator-specified condition occurs. user.  TeleForm Service Monitor. and stop each service.  TeleForm Monitor. TeleForm Utilities TeleForm Utilities provide additional functionality beyond creating. The TeleForm Service Monitor Service allows you to use a single service to start and stop all registered TeleForm service instances. If you experience problems with a particular file. and local settings of your TeleForm system. distributing. NOTE The TeleForm Monitor is available only for TeleForm WorkGroup and TeleForm Enterprise. you can re-index and compress a file to help you restore a corrupt file and recover any "good" records remaining. Use TeleForm’s Database Utilities (DBUTIL) occasionally to optimize your system's integrity and to help maintain the database files that TeleForm uses in its daily operation. pause. TeleForm Desktop installs all components on a single machine which performs the functions of the TeleForm server as well as the Scanning. There is absolutely no multi user capability with the Desktop tier. Once a Form Template or image is opened in Viewer. To change the TeleForm tier that you are using.  TeleForm Stats. TeleForm Viewer allows you to view Form Templates (TFT files) and supported image files. TeleForm Stats gives you access to complete workflow analysis. including extensive system and operator statistics. See “Autonomy Customer Support” on page 27. With the Desktop tier you are limited to a single machine and a single instance of each module.Chapter 1 Introduction NOTE The Report Generator is available only for TeleForm Enterprise. one Designer. you can manage and optimize the entire data collection process: from scanning form images to final data output. The TeleForm Service Monitor Application allows you to monitor the status of all active TeleForm services. You can filter the list of services by server or application name and can start. Reader and Verifier station. The TeleForm tier you are using determines the features available to you. TeleForm Desktop TeleForm Desktop is designed for a small business or limited use environments. resume. TeleForm Tiers There are three system tiers of TeleForm. pause. one Reader. • • 36 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  TeleForm Viewer. They also cover more general things such as the average time it takes to evaluate one image in TeleForm Reader.  TeleForm Service Monitor. one Scan Station and one Verifier. Using these statistics. Each tier is created to fulfill the needs of a certain business environment. Statistics cover specific things such as the number of images in a batch that are waiting to be evaluated by Reader stations. and stop each service. you can also print it. contact your Autonomy Customer Service representative. more robust deployments. Enterprise provides functionality geared towards higher end. specifically use of scan station). The Workgroup tier provides much more processing power because it allows for a distributed architecture. TeleForm Enterprise includes all the features available in TeleForm Desktop and Teleform Workgroup. The multi-user configuration allows for multiple designers. and Batch owner group security  Auditing and custom reporting  Clustering support  TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 37 • • • .000 images a day or specifically need some of the additional features available in the Workgroup tier.TeleForm Tiers With that said the Desktop tier is still a fully functional system. As long as there is no need for multiple users to work on the system and the workload is roughly 4. TeleForm Workgroup includes all the features available in TeleForm Desktop and several additional features:  Assign user rights and permissions  Run TeleForm License Manager as a service  Support for Microsoft Windows Universal Naming Convention (UNC)  Revision Control  Distributed Web Capture option (available at additional cost) TeleForm Enterprise TeleForm Enterprise is designed for large scale and high volume processing demands of larger companies or deployments. scanners (personnel scanners. readers and verifiers to again increase the efficiency and capability of the system. Batch subdirectory. and several additional features:  LDAP integration with Microsoft Active Directory  Form folder. TeleForm Workgroup The workgroup tier is designed for small to medium sized businesses that either have outgrown the single user nature of the Desktop tier. Let’s look at the extended features that are available in the other TeleForm tiers before we go anywhere else.000 images processed per day or less Desktop may be a suitable version for your environment. need to process more than the 4. Chapter 1 Introduction • • 38 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . You should also know what other software is installed on your network and how this software is affected by the TeleForm Workgroup installation. it is important to note the relationship between the TeleForm Server and TeleForm Clients (workstations). you must know how your Clients and your Server communicate with each other.  TeleForm Clients (workstations) must only be used to run TeleForm applications.  The TeleForm Server should only be used as an information and operations hub. TeleForm is not certified or supported to operate in a peer-to-peer networking environment. Prepare for Installation CHAPTER 2 Before you install TeleForm WorkGroup or TeleForm Enterprise on your Server. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 39 • • • . IMPORTANT Do not use one of your workstations as a TeleForm Server. In order to properly install and set up your network. IMPORTANT Do not run TeleForm applications on your server (this includes TeleForm Control Center). TeleForm operates in a Client/Server networking environment.  Overview  System Requirements  MS SQL Database  Non-TeleForm Software Installation  Installation Permissions and Operating Rights  Mapped Drives and UNC Paths Overview Before you begin your TeleForm installation.  Reader stations. and how many TeleForm licenses this requires.  Control Center stations.  Whether you need to migrate from one server Operating System to another (if you have a previous TeleForm installation). you must know the following information:  Your server and workstations meets the system requirement.Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation This chapter contains information you should be familiar with before you install TeleForm.  How many total workstations you need for your capture processing.  Scan Stations.  Which workstations are be used as:  Designer stations.  Verifier stations.  AutoMerge Publisher stations. System Requirements See the following sections for information on determining if your servers and workstations are appropriate for running TeleForm:  • • 40 •• • • “OS and Hardware Wizards” on page 41 TeleForm Administration Guide . To use the online requirements wizard 1. and Utilities) do NOT run on VMWare.jsp and log into the customer service site. open the Wizards tab. Go to https://customers. Scan Station. 4. If you do not already have a support account. Earlier versions of TeleForm do not support VMWare. 3. Autonomy recommends that you deploy TeleForm / VMWare in a test configuration to determine if any loss of performance is acceptable. Control Center.com/support/login. VMWare Support TeleForm 10. 2. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 41 • • • . Consult our online wizard for the latest information. The following limitations apply:  Only TeleForm Reader and TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher (AMP) can run on VMWare.  Other TeleForm modules (Designer.System Requirements  “VMWare Support” on page 41  “Server Hardware” on page 42  “Workstation Hardware” on page 43  “Network Requirements” on page 45 OS and Hardware Wizards TeleForm requirements are subject to change.  The operating system for the server used with TeleForm must be supported by both TeleForm and VMWare. After you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown.0 and later supports VMWare Server ESX.  You may experience a decrease in performance when running on VMWare. click the appropriate Wizard. you are prompted to create one.autonomy. Verifier. Under the TeleForm section. the Web Server that hosts the Web Capture client page must meet these requirements: Operating System Microsoft Windows 2003 Enterprise Server (Service Pack 2) Microsoft Windows 2008 Server (32 or 64-bit) Microsoft Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit) • • 42 •• • • Hard Drive 500 MB free disk space (installation space plus room for production images and data) RAM 1 GB TeleForm Administration Guide . Web Server for Web Capture Option If you intend to use the Web Capture Option.5 GB free disk space (installation space plus room for production images and data) RAM 1 GB Network Card 100 Mbps TCP/IP network card Operating System Microsoft Windows 2003 Enterprise Server (Service Pack 2) Microsoft Windows 2008 Server (32-bit or 64-bit) Microsoft Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit) Other DVD-ROM drive NOTE Processor and Server memory has the greatest impact on database activities.42 GHz or higher Hard Drive 1.Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation Server Hardware TeleForm is designed for a Client/Server network environment. Domain Controllers You do not need to install TeleForm on the Primary Domain Controller (PDC) or the Backup Domain Controller (BDC) Server. Processor Pentium 2. your network must have a PDC to install TeleForm. You cannot use a Windows workstation as your TeleForm Server. However. TeleForm does not support a peer-to-peer networking environment. Hard drive speed and available space has the greatest impact on TeleForm applications. 7. Processor Intel Pentium III running at 800MHz or higher Hard Drive 500 MB Free Space RAM 1GB Network Card 100 Mbps TCP/IP network card Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3) Microsoft Windows Vista (Service Pack 2) Microsoft Windows 7 (Service Pack 1) (32-bit and 64-bit) Monitor VGA color or better 17” recommended for Verifier stations Other DVD-ROM drive Mouse or other interface tool Compatible fax server. or Web Server. the number of licenses limits the number of TeleForm workstations that you can run simultaneously.5 . depending on workstation function within TeleForm Workstation Limits You can configure as many workstations as necessary to run your TeleForm applications. as long as all the workstations within the system meet these minimum requirements. scanner. 7.NET Framework 1. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 43 • • • .System Requirements Internet Information Server 6.NET (WSE) Other DVD-ROM drive See “Web Capture Option” on page 39 for more information on the Web Capture option.0.0. However.1 Web Services Enhancements for Microsoft . Workstation Hardware Your TeleForm system can contain a mixture of workstations with different configurations.NET . 1 Reader.5 system (1 Designer. or on any member of a cluster if that cluster is acting as the TeleForm Server. 1 Verifier. RCS workstations are not formally “within” the TeleForm system. and (1) additional Reader license would allow you to run any combination of these licenses on a maximum of (7) workstations. See “Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services” on page 224 for more information on running Reader and AMP as services. • • 44 •• • • Processor Intel Pentium III running at 600 MHz or higher Hard Drive 500 MB Free Space RAM 1 GB TeleForm Administration Guide . NOTE Reader and AMP can only be run as services using TeleForm Enterprise. For example. NOTE Reader and AMP can also be run as regular applications on these server operating systems. Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services When run as a service. See “TeleForm Tiers” on page 36 for more information on TeleForm Tiers. IMPORTANT Reader and AutoMerge Publisher cannot be run as a service on the TeleForm Server. Remote Capture Station Workstations This table outlines the minimum system needed to run Remote Capture Station. Reader and AutoMerge Publisher (AMP) can run on the same operating systems as the TeleForm Server. See Operating System in “Server Hardware” on page 42. (1) TeleForm 10.Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation You cannot run more workstations with TeleForm than the total sum of licenses you have purchased. 1 Scan Station and 1 AutoMerge Publisher) with (1) additional Verifier license. depending on workstation function within TeleForm Web Capture Option Workstations Computers that run the Web Capture Client do not have the same requirements as workstations in the core TeleForm system. scanner.System Requirements Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2) Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Monitor VGA color or better Other DVD-ROM drive Mouse or other interface tool Compatible fax server.0  Windows XP Professional.  Software. Refer to “Server Hardware” on page 42 for more details.  CAT5 (or better) network cabling. TWAIN is not required. Windows Vista. routers. Refer to the server and workstation requirements earlier in this chapter for more details. or Windows 2008 R2 Enterprise Server. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 45 • • • . Network Requirements To install and use TeleForm. including network cables. Any Web Capture client workstation must meet only these requirements:  Internet Explorer 8.  Connections between the workstations and the server. Windows 2008 Enterprise Server. or Windows 7  TWAIN (for scanners and other input devices). If any Web Capture Module client creates batches strictly from images in directories. all running with the TCP/IP protocol. Server and workstations.  100 MBPS high quality network cards NOTE Token Ring is not supported. Windows 2003 Enterprise Server. all with Ethernet network cards. you must have a functional local area network (LAN) that consists of the following basic components:  Hardware. etc. or Web Server. hubs. You are given this option during the TeleForm installation. LDAP TeleForm Enterprise can work with Active Directory to provide security functions. TeleForm automatically selects TCP/IP as your protocol.Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation Network Protocols A network protocol is a set of rules describing how to transmit data across a network. NOTE LDAP is supported only in TeleForm Enterprise. By default. Non-TeleForm Software Installation TeleForm can work with many software and hardware items created by other vendors. in order for them to be used with TeleForm. and they are communicating properly. If both your clients and your Server are configured for TCP/IP communication. You must install and configure them separately. you must have a working MS SQL database application. You must also have a valid user name and password. MS SQL Database Before installing TeleForm. You are prompted to identity this database application during the TeleForm installation. No other LDAP directories are supported. TeleForm uses TCP/IP to transmit data across the network. and at the correct time. The software for these products is not included with TeleForm. Supported versions include:  MS SQL Server 2005  MS SQL Server 2008 (64-bit)  MS SQL Express 2008 (option for single-user installations) The TeleForm install program can create a new database in your MS SQL application or link to an existing database. See “LDAP” on page 94 for information on using TeleForm with LDAP. See “TeleForm Tiers” on page 36 for more information on TeleForm Tiers. See the following table for more information • • 46 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  If you want to use a UNC path. simply specify that location via a UNC path. After installing TeleForm.  Installation Permissions. You must have Administrator permissions to install TeleForm. In order to run TeleForm.  If you want to use a mapped drive. When the TeleForm Setup Program asks you for the location of the TeleForm Server. see “Mapped Drives” on page 53.Installation Permissions and Operating Rights Item /Software When Installed VMWare Before TeleForm. your users must have the appropriate rights to run TeleForm. there are no prerequisites. you must have the appropriate permissions for installing TeleForm. IMPORTANT You must decide how you want to specify the location of the TeleForm server (mapped drive or UNC) before you begin installing TeleForm. all users must have the modify rights to the TeleForm directory. Installation Permissions and Operating Rights Before you begin the TeleForm installation procedure. See “Revision Control” on page 259 for more information. Scanner Before TeleForm Fax Before TeleForm SourceSafe Before or after TeleForm.  Operating Rights. Mapped Drives and UNC Paths TeleForm supports Universal Naming Convention (UNC) paths (\\servername\ volume\path) and mapped Drives. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 47 • • • . we recommend that you migrate your TeleForm system rather than upgrading your current installation.5 from a previous version. and PowerPoint 2007  Export to Access 2007 and Excel 2007  Merge from Access 2007 and Excel 2007 TeleForm Administration Guide . See “Upgrade Versus Migrate” on page 61 for more information. Software Compatibility Microsoft Office 2007 • • 48 •• • •  View Word 2007. and you want to switch to UNC paths.Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation Upgrade Customers If you are upgrading to TeleForm 10. Excel 2007. CHAPTER 3  Install TeleForm This chapter describes all the information needed to install TeleForm. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 49 • • • .  Preliminary Steps  Other Installation Instructions  Create Windows Users for TeleForm  Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory  Install TeleForm to the Server  Fax Server and Scanners  Install Workstations  Activation  Identification Information Preliminary Steps Read “Prepare for Installation” on page 39 before proceeding with the installation steps in this chapter.  Set up Remote Capture Stations. If you do not have enough user accounts in your environment. This user must be a member of the Domain Admins user group.  Perform administrative duties for the TeleForm system. You should also have a unique user account for each TeleForm workstation.Chapter 3 Install TeleForm Other Installation Instructions Remote Capture and Web Capture Options See “Remote Capture Option” on page 167 and “Web Capture Option” on page 179 for information on setting up these two modules. If you do not have a user account with these specifications. or if your existing user accounts do not meet these specifications. Use this user account to run TeleForm on the workstation after TeleForm is installed and configured by the TeleForm administrator.  Install TeleForm on the workstations. Connect Agents For information on installing Export Connect Agents. These users must have at least Change rights to the parent directory of the Teleform installation directory. see the Getting Started with TeleForm guide. See “Create a TeleForm User Group” on page 51 to create a user group for your TeleForm users. follow the steps in “Create TeleForm Users” on page 51. see the Getting Started with TeleForm guide. you must create one. • • 50 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Intelligent Classification Server For information on installing the Cardiff Intelligent Classification Server. Create Windows Users for TeleForm You must have a user with administrative rights and log on as this user to perform the following tasks:  Install TeleForm on the server. If you are going to install TeleForm to an NTFS volume. Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory The parent directory of TeleForm is the directory that contains the TeleForm folder. make sure that the TeleForm administrator and TeleForm users have sufficient security permissions. 2. Create a TeleForm User Group When you create a global group that includes all of your TeleForm users. Refer to your Server documentation for more information on creating user accounts. Create a New User account in Windows. Add all of the previously created TeleForm User accounts to this new group. Refer to the Server’s documentation for more information. there is also a Security tab). Create Windows Administrator The procedure for your Server may be different. 2. if the TeleForm directory is: \\[Server_Name]\Apps\TeleForm then the parent directory of TeleForm is: \\[Server_Name]\Apps\ TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 51 • • • . Create a New Group on your Domain. To create a TeleForm user group 1. To create a Windows Administrator for TeleForm 1. you can simplify the task of sharing TeleForm’s parent directory.Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory NOTE All elements of an NTFS volume have two layers of security (in addition to the Sharing tab. Add this new user to the Domain Admins group for your domain. Create TeleForm Users Create a New User account (if one does not already exist) for each of your TeleForm Users. For example. 13. Select the TeleForm Administrator and click Add. Create the TeleForm directory under the parent directory. 4. 3. 10. Create the parent directory (e. 8. Click OK. The Properties dialog box for the parent directory opens. 6. Click the Share this folder radio button. 7. Select the TeleForm group and click the Allow box for Change Permission.Chapter 3 Install TeleForm This parent directory must be shared. “Apps”). The TeleForm user group and Administrator are shown in the Share Permissions list. 11. 5. 2. • • 52 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Click on the Sharing tab. Right-click the parent directory and choose Sharing. Select the TeleForm user group and click Add. 1. and you must give permission to the TeleForm user group that you set up earlier (described on “Create a TeleForm User Group” on page 51). The Permissions dialog opens. 9. 12. Click Add.g. The Select Users or Groups dialog is displayed. Select the TeleForm Administrator and click the Allow box for Full Control Permission. Click the Permissions button. This gives the TeleForm Administrator account administrative privileges to the shared parent directory of TeleForm. if it is not already selected. 0 and later supports UNC paths. You can now specify the location of the TeleForm Server via a UNC path or mapped drive. Click OK to save these permission settings and return to the Properties dialog box. Install TeleForm to the Server You are now ready to install TeleForm to the TeleForm Server. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 53 • • • . See “Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory” on page 51 for information on this directory. 15. Mapped Drives If you want to use a mapped drive to specify the location of the TeleForm Server during installation. Click OK.Install TeleForm to the Server 14. See the following sections for detailed information:  Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server  Update Files During Install  Run the Setup Program Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server TeleForm 10. you must map a drive to TeleForm’s parent directory. Read “Prepare for Installation” on page 39 for important pre-installation information. Run the Setup Program Follow this procedure to install the TeleForm software to your TeleForm Server. are closed.3 or later results in the loss of the following functions:  Exporting forms to HTML and PDF  Merging forms to HTML and as eForm versions of PDF. The Cardiff TeleForm dialog box opens. 4. 3. simply specify that location via a UNC path.  Reboot the computer after the tasks have been performed. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. Be sure to select a map letter that is free on all the TeleForm workstations.  Remove obsolete files. The AutoMerge Publisher is still able to create “static” PDF files. The TeleForm installation program automatically detects whether these upgrades are needed and prompts you to:  Accept the update of older files. 6. The TeleForm eForm Option is no longer supported as of TeleForm 10. Select Install TeleForm. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TeleForm screen is shown. 2. if necessary. UNC Paths If you want to specify the location of a UNC path. there are no prerequisites.Chapter 3 Install TeleForm The TeleForm Server and each TeleForm workstation MUST use the same drive letter for the mapped drive.3. If the TeleForm installation program does not automatically begin. run Setup. including anti-virus software. The License Agreement screen is shown. When the TeleForm Setup Program asks you for the location of the TeleForm Server. 1. Update Files During Install Some systems may require updated MDAC and PDF driver files before TeleForm can be installed. a. Make sure that all applications. Installing TeleForm 10. 5. Click Next.exe on the DVD. Insert the TeleForm DVD into the drive of the TeleForm server. 7. • • 54 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Specify the TeleForm Parent Directory you created earlier. click Yes. a. 9. If you are specifying the server location via a mapped drive. 8. If you are specifying the server location via a UNC path (see “Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server” on page 53). The Setup Type dialog box opens. ii. you must type the name of the server. The Choose TeleForm Local Directory dialog box opens. Use the format \\servername\volume\path. b.Install TeleForm to the Server  To install TeleForm 10. i. See “Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server” on page 53 for information on mapping a drive to the TeleForm parent directory. a. the License Code dialog box opens. Contact your Cardiff sales representative if you find a discrepancy. This option is recommended for most users. i. 10. For example. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 55 • • • . Select a setup type and click Next. Complete. The Choose TeleForm Server Directory dialog box opens. b. TeleForm is installed with all features. Click No to retain your current TeleForm system with eForm functionality. c. The installation program cannot automatically detect cluster servers. make sure that you add TeleForm to the drive you mapped before running the setup program. type the path here. The License Information Summary dialog box opens. If you are installing TeleForm for the first time on this server.3 or later. 11. if the mapped drive is J:\. If you are installing TeleForm to a cluster server. enter: J:\TeleForm ii. Type your license code in the fields provided and click Next. 12. a. Check this information carefully and click Next. 18. Not all fax servers and scanners can be used with TeleForm. Reboot your machine if prompted to do so. The Database Server dialog box opens. This screen prompts you for the settings under which the License Service should run. a reminder opens for to activate TeleForm via the License Manager. These must be installed to the appropriate machines BEFORE you run the TeleForm Workstation Setup program on those workstations. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box opens. • • 56 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The TeleForm License Service dialog box opens. click Next. This choice is recommended only for advanced users. 16. when installation completes. Custom. 13. 15. Consult our online wizards for the latest information. Allows you to choose the options that are installed. The Setup Status screen displays the progress of the installation. 14. 17. You can usually accept the defaults.Chapter 3 Install TeleForm b. 19. For new installations. The Start Copying Files dialog box opens. You can either select an existing database if you are upgrading or type a name for a new database. Click OK. which is created by the installation program. Fax Server and Scanners The TeleForm workstation setup program asks you to type information about faxes and servers to be used with TeleForm. Select an SQL server and type your login information. Click Finish to exit the TeleForm Setup. If you are satisfied with the current settings. 20. The Select Program Folder screen opens. there may be errors because of driver conflicts. you may need to perform additional steps if necessary. In addition. 3. you need to run a TeleForm workstation install to select a different fax server. Close all other applications. Follow the appropriate steps below as they apply to your fax server. open the Wizards tab. If you do not already have a support account. After you install TeleForm. This ensures that the workstation operator has access to the TeleForm applications after installation. 3. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 57 • • • . you are prompted to create one. Scanner It is important to install and test your scanner before you install TeleForm. Install Workstations IMPORTANT The TeleForm user on any workstation must have administrative rights to that workstation during installation. 2.com/support/login. Log on as the user who will be operating TeleForm on the workstation. your fax server must be installed and configured correctly. 2. Before installing TeleForm. Make sure you select the correct fax server during installation. 2.Install Workstations 1. otherwise. including anti-virus programs. Once you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown. During the TeleForm install.autonomy. Go to https://customers. The steps you follow depend on what type of fax server you have installed on your system.jsp and log into the customer service site. Fax Server 1. you need to type certain information during install to properly configure your fax server to work with TeleForm. there are a few scanner settings that need to be configured after both your scanner and TeleForm have been installed. While you can change your settings within TeleForm. A generated Fax Setup dialog box is illustrated below. To install TeleForm on workstations 1. 8. map a drive to the TeleForm network directory (the directory that you installed TeleForm to on the TeleForm Server) on each workstation where you plan to set up TeleForm. Do NOT use the TeleForm DVD. 4. Choose a local location (on the workstation.  Custom. The Choose Destination screen is shown. This setup is recommended for most users. a.exe program to begin the installation. Double-click the Setup. If you are using mapped drives. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. TeleForm is installed with all features. This setup is recommended only for advanced users. 5. The License Information Summary dialog box opens. 10. The Setup Type dialog box opens. Select a setup type and click Next:  Complete. In the Scanning Interface Selection dialog box. indicate whether you will be scanning from this workstation and click Next. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TeleForm dialog box opens. The License Agreement screen is shown. Run the TeleForm Workstation Setup Program. IMPORTANT Use the exact same letter for the workstation mapped drive as you did for the server.Chapter 3 Install TeleForm 3. For example. You may choose the options you want to install. 6. • • 58 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . NOTE The TeleForm installer installs non-executable files in the local disk/ProgramData/ folder during new installations on Windows 7 machines for UAC compatibility. 9. browse to: J:\TeleForm\Install\Workstation b. not the server) for the TeleForm application and click Next. This is by default and does not need to be specified. Browse to the Install\Workstation subdirectory on the TeleForm server. Click Next. Click Next. 7. Activation Refer to “Fax Server and Scanners” on page 56 for more information on setting up your fax server. 11. In the Fax Options dialog box, select your fax server and click Next. If you will not be using a fax server on this workstation, select None.  You must have your fax software installed and functioning correctly on this workstation before installing TeleForm.  Refer to “Fax Server and Scanners” on page 56 for more information on setting up your fax server. 12. The Select Program Folder dialog box opens. You can usually accept the default value and click Next. 13. Review the Start Copying Files screen and click Next. 14. The installation program copies files to the workstation from the server. When finished, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box opens. 15. Click Finish. If prompted to do so, restart your workstation. 16. Repeat these installation procedures on each workstation on which you plan to run TeleForm. 17. Proceed to “Activation” on page 59. Activation Activation adds a specific code to the TeleForm License Database which allows you to use the TeleForm product. TeleForm does not function until you have entered a valid Activation Code via the Activation Wizard See the following sections for information about activation:  Identification Information  Activation Process Identification Information To activate TeleForm, you need several pieces of identification information.  License Code TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 59 • • • Chapter 3 Install TeleForm  Machine ID  Activation Code The Machine ID and Activation Code are automatically determined when you run the Activation Wizard. License Code The License Code is unique to each customer. You are prompted to type it during the installation process. The License Code determines what features are enabled in TeleForm. It ships in your TeleForm product box. Machine ID The Machine ID is a combination of letters and numbers that identifies the computer from which you launch the Activation Wizard. The Activation Wizard automatically determines the Machine ID when you activate the product. Activation Code The Activation Code is a unique combination of letters and numbers generated during the activation process. After Autonomy Cardiff determines that your System Code and Machine ID are valid, an Activation Code is delivered to you. Activation Process 1. From the Windows Start menu, click Programs Cardiff TeleForm > TeleForm Utilities > TeleForm License Manager. 2. From the File menu, click Activation Wizard. 3. The Activation Wizard launches. 4. Follow the prompts in the wizard. Restore Activation The Activation Wizard can re-send you the original Activation Code. This feature would be used in two situations: • • 60 •• • •  You choose to receive your Activation Code by email, then deleted the email before entering it;  You successfully activated TeleForm, but a problem forced you to reinstall TeleForm and your Activation Code was not retained in the License Database. This problem might occur if the computer suffered a serious crash or the License Database was severely compromised. TeleForm Administration Guide  Upgrade and Migrate CHAPTER 4 This chapter provides information for existing TeleForm customers who want to move to v9. It covers the following topics:  Upgrade Versus Migrate  Upgrade TeleForm  Migrate TeleForm Upgrade Versus Migrate Upgrading and migrating are two different processes for installing TeleForm10.5 when you are currently running an older version of TeleForm. Upgrade Upgrading is the process of installing TeleForm directly over an existing TeleForm system. You can upgrade a server and workstations or the server alone, with TeleForm10.5 installed to new workstations. In the latter situation you lose any workstation-specific settings, but any templates and/or images on the older server are retained. When you upgrade, TeleForm processing must be halted for the duration of the TeleForm installation. Any information and images that are currently processing are retained for processing by the TeleForm installation.See “Upgrade TeleForm” on page 62 for instructions. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 61 • • • Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate Migrate Migrating is the process by which you install TeleForm on a “fresh” computer or network while your current TeleForm system continues to process documents. Once the new system is ready, you move your TeleForm settings from the older system to the new one. To move the information, you take a “snapshot” of the older system and then apply it to the TeleForm10.5 installation. Any data and images that are being processed by the older system when the snapshot is taken are not captured. See “Migrate TeleForm” on page 65 for instructions. Upgrade TeleForm Upgrading to 10.5 from an existing TeleForm system is a six-step process: 1. “Check Your Current Version” on page 62 2. “Check Your System Requirements” on page 63 3. “Stop TeleForm Processing” on page 63 4. “Back Up Data” on page 63 5. “Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server” on page 64 6. “Install TeleForm Workstations” on page 64 Check Your Current Version You can directly upgrade to TeleForm 10.0 and later from the following older versions of TeleForm: • • 62 •• • •  v8  v8.1  v8.2  9.0  9.1 TeleForm Administration Guide Upgrade TeleForm Check Your System Requirements Even if you are currently running a version of TeleForm that can be directly upgraded to 10.5, you must be sure that your server, workstations, and network protocol meet the system requirements for 10.0 and later. See “System Requirements” on page 40 for detailed information. If your existing server hardware does not meet the minimum system requirements for 10.5, you should migrate instead of upgrading. See “Migrate TeleForm” on page 65 for instructions on migrating. It is possible to upgrade the server and then install 10.5 to new workstations, in which case you lose any workstation-specific settings but your templates and images remain (because they are stored on the server). Stop TeleForm Processing Stop all TeleForm processes and services. IMPORTANT To perform a direct upgrade, you MUST be able to stop TeleForm processing COMPLETELY. If you cannot stop processing for the time needed to install TeleForm to your server and workstation, you should migrate to a a fresh TeleForm system instead of directly upgrading. Back Up Data After you have stopped all TeleForm applications, you should back up the Pervasive server used for your existing TeleForm application, as well as the TeleForm server itself. This step is a precaution in case of a major error during the upgrade installation. In the unlikely event of an error, you can follow the instructions in “Migrate TeleForm” on page 65. During the migration process you can restore your backed-up settings. 1. Run tfmigutl.exe, located in the root folder of your existing TeleForm system. 2. The Migration Utility dialog box opens: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 63 • • • Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate 3. Choose Save snapshot from the Operation drop-down list. 4. Select all of the items in the Categories display pane. 5. Click Start. 6. You are prompted to define the name and location for the snapshot file. This snapshot is saved as a ZIP file. 7. After the file has been saved, click Close on the Migration Utility. Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server Install TeleForm 10.5. Follow the instructions found in “Run the Setup Program” on page 54. NOTE Autonomy recommends that you install TeleForm 10.5 to same location as your existing TeleForm system. Install TeleForm Workstations Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new 10.5 TeleForm\Install\ Workstation folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You can install 10.5 directly over existing TeleForm workstations or to new workstations. If you install 10.5 to new workstations, you should remove the older version of TeleForm from the older workstations. • • 64 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Migrate TeleForm Migrate TeleForm As described earlier, migrating involves installing TeleForm on a clean server and workstations, then moving the settings from your older TeleForm system to the new installation. Data and images that are in-process on the existing system when you switch to the new one are not retained by the snapshot that captures the settings from the existing system. NOTE Migrating from an older TeleForm system to TeleForm 10.5 shares some of the same steps as upgrading. To migrate to TeleForm 10.5 from an older TeleForm system 1. “Check Your Current Version” on page 62 2. “Check Your System Requirements” on page 63 3. “Back Up Data” on page 63 4. “Install TeleForm Server” on page 65 5. “Install One TeleForm Workstation” on page 65 6. Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System 7. “Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations” on page 67 Install TeleForm Server Follow the instructions found in “Run the Setup Program” on page 54 to install TeleForm to your new server. Install One TeleForm Workstation Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new TeleForm\Install\ Workstation\ folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You can install TeleForm10.5 directly over an existing TeleForm workstation or to a new workstation. If you install TeleForm10.5 to a new workstation, you should remove the older version of TeleForm from the older workstations afterwards. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 65 • • • Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System 1. Run tfmigutl.exe from the TeleForm TeleForm10.5 workstation you installed in Step 6. Do NOT run the Migration Utility from your older version of TeleForm. 2. The following dialog box opens: 3. Choose Restore from snapshot from the Operation drop-down list. 4. Select all of the items in the Categories display pane. 5. Click Start. 6. You are prompted to select the snapshot file. This snapshot is saved as a ZIP file. Select the snapshot file you saved earlier and click Open. 7. After the snapshot settings have been extracted to your TeleForm10.5 system, click Close on the Migration Utility. • • 66 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Migrate TeleForm Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new TeleForm\Install\ Workstation\ folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You can install TeleForm10.5 directly over existing TeleForm workstations or to new workstations. If you install TeleForm10.5 to new workstations, you should remove the older version of TeleForm from the older workstations afterwards. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 67 • • • Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate • • 68 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide  Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems CHAPTER 5 This chapter describes how to connect modules to multiple TeleForm systems. Although this option is available to all customers, it may be particularly useful in the following situations:  You have a separate test or development TeleForm system and a production TeleForm system. When you are testing modifications, rather than devoting modules full-time to the test system, you can target it with a particular set of modules. When the new or modified options are ready for production, it's easy to switch the modules back to the production system.  You have multiple production systems and your Verifier operators are not running at peak efficiency on one or more of them. The Verifier operators can be instructed to connect to another system when appropriate. This chapter includes the following sections:  Configured Per Module  TeleForm System dialog box  Batch Routing TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 69 • • • Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems Configured Per Module This feature must be enabled for each individual module that needs the ability to connect to multiple systems. NOTE Configuring multiple systems using the Select TeleForm System dialog box on a Verifier station does NOT automatically give a Reader module on a different workstation the option to connect to the same systems. CAUTION If you switch Reader stations between TeleForm systems, Autonomy recommends that you do NOT switch any Readers that are configured to perform critical tasks, such as Batch commit. TeleForm System dialog box This dialog box can be used to connect to a TeleForm system and to add or remove TF systems. By default, all TeleForm installations have a System Count of 1. To add systems, see “Add a TeleForm System” on page 71. Name Shows the name of each system currently configured. These systems can be added by clicking the button. • • 70 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide TeleForm System dialog box Directory Shows the TeleForm Server directory. + (plus) Button Click this button to add a new TeleForm system to the list. The Add New System dialog box opens, which allows you to specify the new system. - (minus) Button This button deletes the currently selected system from the TELEFORM.INI file. You are prompted to confirm the decision. Make this the default Specifies the default TeleForm system. Only one system listed in the Select TeleForm System dialog box can be the default. Only show this dialog if <Ctrl> + <Alt> keys are pressed at startup When this option is enabled, the Select TeleForm System dialog box opens only when an operator presses the CTRL and ALT keys simultaneously and immediately after launching the module on the current workstation. If this option is disabled, the Select TeleForm System dialog box opens automatically when the module is launched. Add a TeleForm System This system does not need to be a fresh installation. It could be a TeleForm system that has been in service for some time, but that has never been connected to the module you are currently working on. To add a TeleForm system 1. Start the TeleForm module. 2. Immediately press the CTRL and ALT keys simultaneously. 3. The Select TeleForm System dialog box opens. 4. Click the + button. 5. The Add New System dialog box opens. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 71 • • • Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems 6. Specify the Name and Directory (TeleForm Server Directory) of the new TeleForm system. 7. Click OK. 8. The new system is listed on the Select TeleForm System dialog box. 9. Repeat for any other TeleForm modules that need the ability to connect to multiple systems. Batch Routing If you connect a single Scan Station to multiple TeleForm systems, you may experience problems with batches intended for one system being routed to the other system. The problem can occur when the batches are saved to the Local Batch Directory (the Workstation Base Batch Directory entry in the workstation INI file) and are not accepted by the Scan Station operator before the module is switched to a second TeleForm system. Depending on the settings used by the incorrect TeleForm system, these batches may have serious identification, recognition, and/or export failures. The default configuration of TeleForm does not use the Local Batch Directory. You must manually configure a TeleForm system to create batches in this directory on a workstation. Ordinarily batches are saved to a batch directory on the TeleForm Server. There are two solutions:  • • 72 •• • • Ensure that all Scan Station operators accept (or delete) all batches from the local batch directory before switching to the other TeleForm system. TeleForm Administration Guide Batch Routing  Use the TeleForm Database Utilities program (DBUTIL) to set the batch numbers for System1 to a range that does not overlap the batch numbers for System2. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 73 • • • . Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems • • 74 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  What type of TeleForm modules you can run. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 75 • • • . Enterprise. you entered a license code that enabled at least one of the TeleForm Designer. which determines what version and platform (Desktop. or Workgroup) you are running. Reader and Verifier modules.  Introduction to License Codes  Using License Manager Introduction to License Codes When you installed TeleForm.  How many TeleForm modules you can run. The license code controls:  Your base license. Manage Licenses CHAPTER 6 This chapter provides instructions on managing the license codes that control how many workstations your TeleForm system can use and what modules can be run on those workstations. Database Utilities. such as License Manager itself. For example. those services are included in the licensed number of modules. The Remote Capture Option.” Some of them simply expand the capabilities of the core modules. are not licensed. or AutoMerge Publisher if you do not have a license that enables those modules. and MediClaim Option are controlled by license codes.  Number of workstations on which TeleForm modules can run. Using License Manager TeleForm License Manager is a utility that helps you maintain and upgrade your TeleForm licenses. Licensed Options Many TeleForm options are also controlled by license codes.Chapter 6 Manage Licenses Licensed Modules The core TeleForm modules are restricted by a license. TeleForm Administration Guide . They can run even if the TeleForm License Service is stopped and are not restricted by a license code. These options are not always “modules. Web Capture Option. Unlicensed Modules Other portions of TeleForm. Verifier. and the TeleForm documentation. Although TeleForm Enterprise can run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as services. View License Information The License Summary section of the License Manager dialog box lists: • • 76 •• • •  Product (Enterprise or Workgroup)  Number of licenses for each licensed TeleForm module. These modules also require the TeleForm License Service to be running. Stats. Reader. Monitor. Scan Station. your license may specify 5 Readers. which means you can run as many as 5 instances of Reader. You cannot run Designer. Many Image Export Connect Agents are also license-controlled. View License Specifics To view the details of a license 1. double-click a license. Click Close on the License Manager dialog box. In the License Manager dialog box. you may need to remove a TeleForm license from your system.Using License Manager To view your license information 1. A summary of the installed licenses is shown in the License Information section. The License Specifics dialog box opens. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 77 • • • . Delete a License In certain instances. 2. To close the License Specifics dialog box. 2. 3. or your Autonomy Cardiff sales representative. click OK. 4. Click File > License Info. 3. The License Manager application opens. From the Windows Start menu Applications > TeleForm > Utilities > License Manager. Delete a TeleForm license only under the advice of an Autonomy Cardiff Technical Support Representative. The License Manager dialog box opens. OR In the License Manager dialog box.Chapter 6 Manage Licenses To delete a TeleForm license 1. Start TeleForm License Manager. Add a New License Code 1. 4. 5. Click Close on the License Manager dialog box. The License Manager dialog box opens.  Click Yes to delete the license. Start TeleForm License Manager. You are prompted to confirm your decision. 2. Type the new license code in the Add License Code dialog box. 6. Click File > License Info. 4. Click OK. In the File menu. click Add. 3. Select a license and click the Delete button. 2.  Click No to retain the license. 3. • • 78 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . select Add License. a thin client and web browser-based application delivery system with robust features. Overview TeleForm is supported for Citrix XenApp. off-site users can run TeleForm through a client window with the look and feel of a local TeleForm session. This chapter describes what you need to get started with the TeleForm Designer and Verifier modules in a Citrix XenApp environment. Combining Citrix XenApp and TeleForm allows the XenApp Server to host a number of sessions concurrently while clients execute TeleForm Designer and Verifier remotely. It includes the following sections:  Overview  System Requirements  Installation Process  Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp For information about Citrix XenApp. With the Citrix ICA Client. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 79 • • • . so that you can use TeleForm for remote verification. TeleForm Remote Verification CHAPTER 7 Autonomy has certified TeleForm for use within a Citrix environment. refer to the Citrix documentation. 3. you need the following: XenApp Server (MFS) Refer to XenApp documentation for a list of supported server configurations. “Install Software Prerequisites” on page 81 2. If you do not already have a support account.autonomy. To find the online wizard 1. 2.com/support/login. 4. After you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown. open the Wizards tab. TIP You can use Citrix Web Interface Management to ensure that workstations have the most recent version of the XenApp client when logging in to the XenApp server using a Web browser. Citrix ICA Client ICA Client installed on a workstation that runs TeleForm via the MFS.Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification System Requirements To run TeleForm with Citrix XenApp. “Install TeleForm to XenApp Server” on page 81 • • 80 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Installation Process The installation process can be broken into several steps: 1. Go to https://customers. The TeleForm Server cannot be the same machine as the XenApp Server. TeleForm requirements are subject to change. Consult our online wizard for the latest information. TeleForm Server (TFS) See “System Requirements” on page 40 for information. you are prompted to create one. click the OS Wizard. Under the TeleForm section. “Log Off Users” on page 81 3.jsp and log into the customer service site. Log Off Users Before beginning the installation procedure.5 times the amount of physical memory. or 2008 R2 should be installed first.Installation Process Install Software Prerequisites Make sure the following steps have been taken before proceeding with the installation: XenApp Server Microsoft Windows 2003 Server. TeleForm Server Your TeleForm Server should be configured and running on the LAN before you begin the TeleForm/Citrix XenApp installation. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 81 • • • . Add/Remove Programs places the computer in install mode and returns the computer to execute mode when the installation is complete. Any open or disconnected sessions must be terminated. Locate the system page file on the data drive. Use Add/Remove Programs to install TeleForm Enterprise Workstation on XenApp. Install TeleForm to XenApp Server To install TeleForm to the XenApp server 1. TIP Autonomy recommends the following configuration:  A Raid 5 drive array  3 active disks  1 hot spare disk Set the system page file to 2. make sure that no users are logged on to the XenApp Server. IMPORTANT Citrix XenApp and TeleForm are not certified to run on the same Server. 2008. You can use the Add/Remove Programs method multiple times if you clear the Finish dialog too soon. refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article (especially the Additional Notes at the bottom of the article): http://support. This method ensures that the software is available to all users after installation. You must install all TeleForm Service Packs to match the TeleForm Enterprise Server before you finish the Administrator Install. Install the latest TeleForm build or patch to the XenApp Server via Add/ Remove Programs. Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp To upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp 1. After the installation is complete. When the Finish Admin Install dialog box opens. 2. TIP You can also switch the terminal server to install mode using the change user /install command.microsoft. you must set the terminal server back to runtime mode using the change user /execute command. During the install. wait for the installation process to complete. 4. Restart the XenApp server. • • 82 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Scanning is not supported through Citrix and can cause problems in some cases when included. when asked if you would like to include Scanning Support you must select No. as described on “Install TeleForm to XenApp Server” on page 81.Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification IMPORTANT The TeleForm version that you install on the XenApp server must exactly match the version of TeleForm installed on the Enterprise system. or if the server needs to restart. Install the latest TeleForm build or patch to the TeleForm Server. then click Finish. 3. For more information about this command.com/kb/q186504/ 2. Your station name is displayed in the title bar. you must give them access rights to:  the TeleForm executable directory on the XenApp server  the Application Data\Cardiff\TeleForm directory where user configuration files are stored Citrix Delivery Services Console The Delivery Services Console publishes and maintains applications on XenApp servers. access the Utilities > Configuration window. executable name or server name.Administration Administration Before users can use TeleForm modules through XenApp. You can determine if the current session has a valid station name stored in the USER. 2. You install published applications on a Citrix server and configure them for multi-user access from remote workstations. To determine your current session name 1. Publishing an application allows a user at an ICA Client workstation to start the application without knowing details of the application's directory. Launch the TeleForm Verifier through a Citrix client. For example: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 83 • • • .DAT file. Confirm the Session Station Name Every instance of TeleForm Workstation running in XenApp must have a unique session name. See “Manage Licenses” on page 75 for more information on license codes. right click the station and then click Delete Station. • • 84 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . independent of how the Verifier is connected.Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification Use TeleForm Control Center to Delete Stations To remove unwanted configuration settings from the TeleForm Enterprise System using the TeleForm Control Center. If you do not have enough licenses. TeleForm License Errors Your Enterprise system must have one TeleForm license available for each concurrent TeleForm Verifier. you receive an error indicating that no license is available.  Overview  Purpose of Security  Security Rights  Enable Security  Create a New User  Configure Users  Security Groups  Log In  Switch Security Providers Overview You can enable Security from TeleForm Control Center. ensuring that less-trained users do not have access to critical functions. Administrators can set up different operators with different levels of access to your TeleForm system. Security CHAPTER 8 This chapter discusses the security options available to both TeleForm Enterprise and TeleForm Workgroup users. if you have the required rights. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 85 • • • . You can also access security from most TeleForm modules. This feature is a Job-level setting and thus applies only to batches. you can simply apply tested. For example. the problem of an operator gaining inappropriate access to other modules is somewhat lessened. users who belong to the Designer group automatically have the right to run and configure Designer. the batch images are saved to subdirectories in the TELEFORM\BAT\ folder. in turn. As your system grows. Copying user rights from one operator to another is now faster and easier. disables rights that require it. Specific rights can be enabled or disabled by the Administrator for particular needs. Since Enterprise and Workgroup systems use multiple operators and workstations. When enabled. TeleForm's statistical reports are more valuable when broken down by operator rather than raw totals. By enabling Security. Enabling one right can enable other required rights.  Image Security. Enterprise systems rely on the improved internal TeleForm security protocol.Chapter 8 Security TeleForm provides pre-defined groups with default rights to simplify the process. For example. and operator information comes directly from the security log-in function. even though they should be allowed to run the TeleForm modules that perform these tasks. All batches processed with the “Loan” job setting would be saved to subdirectories in the “Loan” subfolder.  External Security Providers.  Copying User Rights. Administrators can also create custom groups. However. the Security function does allow you to specify exactly what tasks an operator can perform within the various TeleForm modules.  Track. Purpose of Security TeleForm Security serves several purposes: • • 86 •• • •  Restrict Access. Enterprise Security Options TeleForm Enterprise supports several security options that are not supported in TeleForm Workgroup. Your system administrator would be responsible for setting the Windows access rights to the “Loan” subfolder so that unauthorized users could not view the images. TeleForm Administration Guide . your reports show how each operator is performing. Disabling a right. you might set up a “Loan” subdirectory in the BAT folder. proven user rights to new operators. Enterprise customers can take advantage of external security providers. Many operators should not be given the permission to delete image files or see batches created by Security Groups to which they do not belong. a Verifier operator can forward a problematic item to another operator or to a supervisor. you can feed your Verifier operators with tasks for which they are best suited. Security Rights Enabling the proper security rights is a key aspect of managing an Enterprise system. Security lets TeleForm know which operators are working.Security Rights  Increase Efficiency. This Enterprise-only feature is a Job-level setting and thus applies only to batches.  Route. thereby improving overall accuracy and throughput. By using a combination of Security and the Auto-Batch Assign function. The supervisor role is defined in a user's security rights.Your system administrator would be responsible for setting the Windows access rights to the subfolder so that unauthorized users could not view the files. the batch files are saved to subdirectories in the TELEFORM\BAT folder. When security is enabled.  Batch Security. When enabled. which in turn enables the routing feature. so without security you have neither a name nor an organizational target for routing problematic items. See the following topics for detailed information:  Available Security Rights  Group Rights and Individual Rights Available Security Rights Security Rights are organized into the following categories:  Form & Image Access  Verify (Basic)  Verify (Advanced)  Verify (QC))  Evaluate  Design  Scan  Utilities TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 87 • • • . Another important consideration is HOW you assign rights to users: at the individual or group level. Security's payoff in operator efficiency is perhaps its most powerful application. • • 88 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . which allow a user configure the Verifier module and other more complex tasks.Chapter 8 Security  Administration Form & Image Access These rights define access to form and document files in multiple TeleForm modules. an advanced Verifier operator should have all of the Basic rights along with whatever Advanced rights are appropriate. For example. In most cases. the Create right does NOT automatically select the Run Designer right in the Design category:  Create  Open  Modify  Delete  Import/Export  View Images  Print & Save Images Verify (Basic) These rights give a user the ability to perform verification. They can be contrasted to the Verify (Advanced) rights.  Run Verifier  Use Batch Management  Use Image Management  Use Auto-Assign  Use Form Selection  Use Template Mode  Use Field Mode  Use Character Mode  Use Capture Mode Verify (Advanced) These rights allow a Verifier operator to use more powerful features than the Verify (Basic) rights. Some of these rights are not useful unless rights in other categories are also enabled. Security Rights  Configure Verifier  Supervisor  Override Validations  Delete Images  See Batches of Other Groups  Process Research Queue Verify (QC) These rights allow a Verifier operator to use the Quality Control features of Verifier. although Recognition Sets can also be configured in Designer.  Run Reader  Configure Reader  Configure Template Sets  Evaluate Images Design These rights apply strictly to TeleForm Designer. a QC Verifier operator should have all of the Basic and Advanced rights along with whatever QC rights are appropriate.  Use Classification QC  Use Image QC  Use Extraction QC  Use Anytime QC (edit)  Use Anytime QC (view)  Add items in QC  Classify/Unclassify Evaluate These rights apply primarily to TeleForm Reader. In most cases.  Run Designer  Configure Designer  Debug Scripts TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 89 • • • . such as Automated Batch Creation.Chapter 8 Security  Shape Library (Add/Modify)  Run IDR Designer Scan These rights apply strictly to the Scan Station. are not constrained by these rights. • • 90 •• • •  Run Monitor  Purge Statistics Log  Configure Monitor  Configure Advanced Settings  View Log/Tracking TeleForm Administration Guide .  Run Scan Station  Configure Scan Station:  Create Batch  Discard Batches After Accept  Configure Scanners  Configure Jobs Utilities These rights provide access to accessory TeleForm modules. Other methods of creating a batch.  Run Viewer  Run Control Center  Run Statistics Reports  Run AutoMerge Publisher  Configure AutoMerge Publisher Administration These rights allow access to administrative programs and tasks. A user who is defined as an Administrator via the Administrator checkbox on the Rights tab of the User Configuration dialog box enjoys additional rights that are not individually specified and cannot be selected from the Administration category. These rights are hidden to prevent non-Administrator users from accidentally being given certain permissions. Assign rights that are unlikely to need modification through Security Group membership. enabling a right that requires other rights. Use the left pane to modify user rights. or no rights have been enabled. The Aggregate Rights pane of the User TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 91 • • • . Assigning rights through Security Group memberships makes it easy to change rights for multiple operators.  Group Rights.Security Rights  Run Service Monitor  Configure Service Monitor Group Rights and Individual Rights You can assign Security rights to a TeleForm user on an individual or group level. all rights have been enabled.  Individual Rights. See “Group Rights” on page 92. For example. If you removed him from the Designer Security group. but disabling a right that other rights require disables the associated rights. Certain users may require unique rights that do not lend themselves to a specific Security Group. Aggregate rights are displayed in the right pane. he would still have all the available Designer rights. enables those other rights. See “Individual Rights” on page 91. Conversely. are organized in a tree structure.  Group and Individual Rights. Individual rights are displayed in the left pane. both individual and group. assigning some rights to a user on an individual basis but using Security Group membership to define others. You give “Pete” all the Designer rights as an individual and also add him to the Designer Security group. There are three states for each aggregate right: some rights have been enabled. change the rights that pertain to a Security Group and all the members immediately have the new permissions. with no need to update individual rights. since they were assigned to him as an individual. You can use both methods in combination. You can also use both methods in combination. then change other rights on the individual level. Enabling the rights for a branch also enables the rights for all the nodes contained in that branch. Group rights may be too broad for your needs. Individual Rights Rights assigned to the user as an individual pertain only to that user and are retained despite any changes in that user's Security Group memberships. You may enable or disable the individual nodes to customize the rights for a given operator. Rights Structure Rights. The needs of your organization determine the best way to assign rights. Their scanning rights are completely contained within their Security Group membership. The Individual Rights pane of the User Configuration > Rights dialog box is never updated based on group memberships. It's possible for a user to have NO individual rights but to belong to the Administrator Security Group and thus enjoy ALL of the possible TeleForm permissions. For example. In the Control Center tree. Launch TeleForm Control Center. that user is allowed to perform all the tasks that his or her Security Group memberships allow. Pete. Select the Security sub-tab. The Global TeleForm Settings dialog box opens. Basic or Advanced. Even if the user is assigned none of these rights on an individual basis. You never enable any Scanner rights. 3. expand the Configuration Settings branch and click the Global Settings branch. 4. Group Rights When you assign a user to a Security Group. for them on an individual level.Chapter 8 Security Configuration > Rights dialog box would show that Pete has all the Designer rights. Enable Security To enable security 1. and Sam to the Scanners > Advanced Security group. Double-click the Global System setting. If you change the rights that pertain to the Scanners > Advanced Security group. the pane would only show that he did not have those rights if you removed them from him at the individual level. • • 92 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . there is no need to update any group member's individual scanning rights. 2. that user immediately enjoys all the rights that belong to that group. You assign Heather. 7. IMPORTANT There are no external providers for security in TeleForm Workgroup. When you enable security. You must run TeleForm Enterprise to access the Provider option. 6. See “Security Providers” on page 93 for information on the Provider option. Security Providers NOTE There are no external providers for security in TeleForm Workgroup. This option is enabled by default. 8. Click OK.Enable Security 5. Check the Enable user security box. Remember last login: When security is enabled. this option causes the TeleForm Login dialog box to remember the name of the last user to login and places the input focus on the Password field. You must run TeleForm Enterprise to access the Provider option. you can choose from three Provider options: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 93 • • • . See “Single Sign-on” on page 95 for information on the Single sign-on option. The only time this information must be provided is if the user who is logged onto the computer does not have access to the LDAP Server. If the User and Password are not specified the credentials for the user currently logged onto the computer are used. this field does not need to contain any information. but if the appropriate Delete rights are not granted through the TeleForm Security function. Port Access port for the LDAP Server. Password • • 94 •• • • Generally. The only time this information must be provided is if the user who is logged onto the computer does not have access to the LDAP Server. that user cannot delete files from within TeleForm. Server Name of the LDAP Server to be used. an operator's rights within TeleForm are always defined by the application's own security settings. The LDAP Provider Setup dialog box configures the LDAP system that provides external security to TeleForm. For example. this field does not need to contain any information. TeleForm cannot work properly if the user only has Browse rights. TeleForm works only with Active Directory. you must setup TeleForm to connect with a user who has rights to pull all attributes for other users. NOTE With LDAP enabled. User Generally. LDAP Links TeleForm to an existing LDAP protocol. click the Setup button. If the User is not specified the credentials for the user currently logged onto the computer are used. TeleForm Administration Guide . a user may have rights to delete files under Windows. No other LDAP directory is supported. Group LDAP Group to which the TeleForm system belongs.Chapter 8 Security  Internal  LDAP  Windows Although LDAP and Windows determine the log-in security method. Internal This option is the regular TeleForm security method for logging in to the system. After selecting LDAP in the Provider list. this field does not need to contain any information. If TeleForm cannot verify that the user is already logged in through an external security provider or encounters another error. this field does not need to contain any information. The Windows Provider Setup dialog box allows you to configure the Windows system that provides external security to TeleForm. If the User and Password are not specified the credentials for the user currently logged onto the computer are used. Password Generally. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 95 • • • . If the User is not specified the credentials for the user currently logged onto the computer are used. If you use TeleForm's internal security. Single sign-on allows a logged-in user to open another TeleForm module without logging in to that new module. Domain Name of the Windows domain to be used. If Single sign-on is not enabled.  Error handling. Single Sign-on Single sign-on is available only when security is enabled. It can be used with any security provider.Enable Security Windows Links TeleForm to an existing LDAP protocol. Users can log into TeleForm using this tool. NOTE There are no external providers for security in TeleForm Workgroup. click the Setup button. Group Windows Group to which the TeleForm system belongs. the regular TeleForm Login dialog box is displayed. Using Single sign-on with an external security provider automatically logs a user into TeleForm modules when that user is already logged in to the workstation via LDAP or Windows protocols. a user must log into to each module that is opened on a workstation.  External Security Providers. The following topics explain the different aspects of the Single sign-on option:  Internal Security. After selecting Windows in the Provider list. although the function is somewhat different when used with TeleForm's internal security rather than LDAP or Windows. User Generally. 3.  Administrator log in. 2. There are two ways to log in as an administrator when Single sign-on is enabled AND TeleForm is using an external security provider:  Start a TeleForm module on a workstation with a user name that is not a valid TeleForm user. Create a New User The methods used to create new TeleForm users depends on what Security Provider was selected when you enabled security (“Security Rights” on page 87). Single sign-on does not log a user in as a TeleForm administrator. then login manually. In the Control Center tree. Launch TeleForm Control Center.Chapter 8 Security  Logging out. • • 96 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . then log off and log back in manually.  Internal Security  External Security Internal Security To create a new user with internal security 1. expand the Configuration Settings branch and click the Global Settings branch. The Security dialog box opens. logging into TeleForm again requires the regular TeleForm login procedure. Double-click the Security setting. If a user logs out from a TeleForm module but not from the workstation.  Run TeleForm on a workstation that does have a valid TeleForm user name. The Add New Operator dialog opens. Enter the following information:  Login Name: The new operator needs to type this name to log into a TeleForm application. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 97 • • • .Create a New User 4. up to 24 characters.  Password and Verify Password: A password can be any combination of letters or numbers. so the words “secret”. To add a new user. Passwords are not case sensitive. “SECRET”. and “sEcReT” are all considered to be the same. 5. right-click in the Users pane and select New User.  Display Name: This name identifies the operator in TeleForm reports. In the Control Center tree. you must create a user using the External Security protocol. 8. Launch TeleForm Control Center. Create new users in the Windows Domain/Group or the LDAP Server/Group.Chapter 8 Security 6. then synchronize TeleForm with the external system. 4. If your system uses an External Security Provider. expand the Configuration Settings branch and click the Global Settings branch. Right-click inside the Users window and select Synchronize. • • 98 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 5. and display name for a user. You must run TeleForm Enterprise to use external security. External Security NOTE There are no external providers for security in TeleForm Workgroup. Click OK to add the new operator. 2. See “Configure Users” on page 99 for instructions on changing the rights. When this option is selected. You may set rights and configuration settings instantly by selecting another user from the Copy from user drop-list. 3. Double-click the Security setting. The Security dialog box opens. you may choose which settings to copy from the following checkboxes:  Group Memberships  Rights  Configuration Settings 7. See your Windows or LDAP documentation for information on creating new users. To create a new user with external security 1. group memberships. Configure Users You can configure a user manually. group memberships. change the user information or password. On the Security dialog box. 3. open the Users tab. Manually Configure a User To manually configure a user 1. or delete the user. Configuration Settings. 2. Global Settings. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 99 • • • . click Security or use Control Center. copy the user settings. and display name for a user. You can also change a user’s display name and password without modifying the more important security rights and group memberships. See “Configure Users” on page 99 for instructions on changing the rights. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator.Configure Users 6. The users you created in the Windows or LDAP system is added to TeleForm. Security. From the Utilities menu. Chapter 8 Security 4. On the Rights tab of the User Configuration dialog box. Open the Memberships tab. Right-click the operator and select Properties. 6. define the Rights for the operator. • • 100 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 5. Configure Users 7. 3. Click OK on the Security dialog box. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 101 • • • . From the Utilities menu. 2. Define the security groups to which the operator belongs. Log on to a TeleForm module as an administrator. On the Security dialog box. Click OK on the User Configuration dialog box. 9. 8. click Security. Copy User Settings To copy user settings 1. open the Users tab. Chapter 8 Security 4. 8. Right-click the user whose settings you want to change and select Copy Settings from User.. The Copy User Settings dialog box opens. Click OK on the Security dialog box. 5. 6. Click OK on the Copy User Settings dialog box.. Settings Available for Copying You can copy any or all of the following settings from an existing user. See 7.”The check boxes below determine what aspects of the existing user's configuration profile are be copied. The Copy from user list lets you select an existing user as a “template. • • 102 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .. you should delete the existing operator and create a new one. The user being modified has the same configuration settings as the copied user. The user being modified belongs to the same Security Groups as the copied user.  Configuration Settings. click Security. On the User Info tab of the User Configuration dialog box. You cannot change the Login Name. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 103 • • • . The user being modified has the same Security Rights as the copied user. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator. open the Users tab. Right-click the operator and select Properties. 5. To create a new Login Name for an existing user.Configure Users  Group Memberships. 2. From the Utilities menu. 3.  Rights. change the user’s Display Name. On the Security dialog box. 4. Change User Info To change user information 1. click Security. From the Utilities menu. On the Security dialog box. 3. • • 104 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2. open the Users tab. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator.Chapter 8 Security Change Password To change the password of a user 1. IMPORTANT There is no confirmation prompt when you delete a user. Delete Users To delete a user  Right-click on the Login Name of the user in the user’s list and select Delete.Configure Users 4. The Set Password dialog opens. 5. Right-click on the user and select Set Password. Enter and confirm the new password. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 105 • • • . Click OK. The user is deleted instantly. 6.  Personal information collected from and documents (medical history. are not asked to do so. Correction. or group of items. It allows you to create groups of users who share the same rights.Chapter 8 Security Security Groups The Security Groups function plays an important role in TeleForm Enterprise systems. if the batch contains items that it should not (that is. The Security Groups feature can be used to ensure that:  Verifier operators who have not been trained to process (Image QC. nor to network folders that store TeleForm data. document. whether from scanned documents or items in a directory. When used in conjunction with the Batch Processing and AutoBatch Assign functions. However. product pricing.  Images that contain business-critical information are routed to employees who have been cleared to see such data. Not Source Security The Security Groups function works in conjunction with TeleForm’s Batch Processing feature to restrict access to batches of images. but it contains items that you did not want that group to see) the Security Group feature does not prevent them from viewing the “unauthorized” items. Batch Security. field sales personnel provide warning of future commitments by mailing Sales Notification to your department. and other critical factors) to individuals who have been with the company for at least two years. Example You are a manager of the capture processing department of a large home appliance manufacturer. you must be sure that the source pages or images are appropriate for the Security Group to whom the batch is assigned. credit rating. Classification QC. You should institute policies to restrict access to hard copy documents and network directories. Furthermore. if you had intended to restrict the batch to one group. When the batch is created. or Data Review) a specific form. Security Groups give you precise control over which Verifier operators are allowed to process a specific batch. financial situation) is shown only to approved users. It cannot prevent unauthorized access to physical copies of documents. • • 106 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Company policy restricts access to prospective sales information (which could influence stock prices. Set up a batch processing Job named “Future Sales. evaluate images. 3. configure Recognition Sets. Scanners . print and save images. 6.Security Groups To set up security in the example manufacturing business 1. create batches.Advanced Run Scan Station. which requires that all your TeleForm operators log-in when they begin work. 2. all shape library rights. all form and document related rights. This Job can enable any of the Quality Control modes. Scanners . When the scanner operator starts a new batch of Possible Sales Notification. After the Sales Notification are scanned. and must be enforced by a department policy. 7. he MUST select the “Future Sales” Job. create batches.Basic Run Scan Station. Only Verifier operators who are logged-in and belong to the “Future Sales” Security Group can process this batch. Auto Merge Publisher and Viewer. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 107 • • • . configure scanners. run and configure Reader. This step cannot be controlled by TeleForm. Create a Security Group named “Future Sales. configure jobs. Pre-Defined Security Groups TeleForm provides the following pre-defined Security Groups: Group Rights Administrators All rights All No rights Designers Run and configure Designer.” 4. configure Scan Station. use Form Log.” This Job must restrict the handling of “Future Sales” batches to the “Future Sales” Security Group. the batch is proceed to the QC modes defined by the Job Setting. Assign Verifier operators to this group. These operators should also have at least two years of experience with the company. 5. Enable the Security function for TeleForm. The notification should be given to a scanner operator who has been with the company for at least two years. Field Mode. run and configure Auto Merge Publisher. Batch Management. Character Mode. run Control Center. The Security dialog box opens. Click on the Groups tab. double-click Configuration Settings and click the Global Settings sub-folder. • • 108 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . run Image Viewer. Double-click Security. process research queue. view batches of others. Capture Mode. QC Modes. Verifiers . Capture Mode. Auto-assign. Capture Mode. In the Control Center tree. Image Management. override validations. batch image viewing. Form select. Launch TeleForm Control Center. Form select. Verifiers . Batch Management. configure jobs. Form Mode. process research queue. Batch Management. Character Mode. Image Management. Image Management. 4. debug scripts. Character Mode. user form log.Chapter 8 Security Group Rights Verifiers . Field Mode. Auto-assign. run and configure Reader. Auto-assign. QC Modes. Field Mode. configure Verifier. Form Mode. delete images. print and save images. override validations. purge statistics log. Form select. run statistics reports. Create a Security Group To create a new group 1. configure Verifier.Advanced Run Verifier.Supervisors Run Verifier. configure Recognition Sets. configure Verifier. Form Mode. supervisor. run Image Viewer. 2. batch image viewing. 3. configure advanced settings. run Image Viewer.Basic Run Verifier. Right-click on the Security Groups folder icon and select New group. 7. 6. NOTE User-defined groups are shown in the Security Groups tree in black text. Type a name for the new group. To set the rights for your new group. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 109 • • • .Security Groups 5. The Security Groups > Rights tab opens. Pre-defined groups are shown in blue text. right-click on the group name and select Properties. See “Add Users to a Security Group” on page 110 for instructions on populating a Security Group. 5. 9. Select individual or aggregate rights by clicking on the appropriate nodes. Add Users to a Security Group To add users to a security group 1. select group “All”. You can rename or delete a user-defined Security Group by right-clicking on it. 10. In the display pane. • • 110 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . NOTE Pre-defined Security Groups cannot be renamed or deleted. You can alter the rights of predefined groups by right-clicking and selecting Properties. From the Groups tab. Click on the new group folder to confirm that the user is a member of that group.Chapter 8 Security 8. From the Users tab. 3. Click the Memberships tab. OR 4. double-click on a user’s Login name. click on the Login name of the user and drag it onto the group name. 2. When a user launches a TeleForm application. If the Remember last login box was checked on the Global System . the Delete option on the File menu is grayed out. Log In If the security option has been enabled. even if all users currently logged in have rights to the given module. users must log on to the TeleForm modules to which they have been given access. If a user’s rights are restricted in a given module. each user must login to each module. For example. you may do so without having to exit and reopen the program. The current user’s name is displayed at the bottom of the application window. they only have access to those options that are permitted under their individual and aggregate rights. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 111 • • • . But if multiple users are logged into the workstation. NOTE If the Single sign-on box was checked on the Global System > Security tab. User1 can open the TeleForm Viewer without logging in a second time. a single user on the workstation may log on once to run any application to which they have rights. the TeleForm Login dialog opens.Log In 6. For example. Select the new group from the Groups list. Log on to a Current Session If a module is already open and you wish to login as another user. If User2 has Advanced Verifier rights and both User1 and User2 are logged in to the same workstation.Security tab. then both users must log on to TeleForm Viewer. if User1 has Designer rights and no one else is logged in to the workstation. even though they both have the rights to run it. if a user has the right to run Designer but no right to delete forms. the Name field is filled in automatically with the last user to login to this workstation. On the Utilities menu.Chapter 8 Security To log on to a current session 1. up to 24 characters. 2. Type your user name in the Name box. Change Logon Passwords Operators may change their password at any time. The Set Password dialog box opens. 2. To change a logon password 1. The TeleForm Login dialog box opens. 4. 3. 4. You are now logged into the module and all actions performed from this workstation are tracked under your user name. and sEcReT are all considered to be the same. SECRET. 3.  Passwords are not case sensitive. • • 112 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . click Change Password. Type the new password once in the Password box and again in the Confirm Password box. Type your password in the Password box and click OK. Log on using your current password. click Log In. On the Utilities menu. NOTE  A password can be any combination of letters or numbers. 5. so the words secret. Click OK to activate the new password. Log Off To log off TeleForm  click Utilities > Log Off. NOTE There are no external providers for security in TeleForm Workgroup. Internal to External If you switch from TeleForm’s internal security protocol to Windows or LDAP. you can switch from an external security provider to TeleForm’s internal security system. since the password link between TeleForm and the external security provider is no longer active. A mapping interface opens automatically if necessary: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 113 • • • . You must run TeleForm Enterprise to use external security. However. See “Change Password” on page 104 for instructions. Switch Security Providers If needed. You can also switch from internal security to an external provider or from one external provider to another. you need to create a new password for each TeleForm user. all users are deleted from the TeleForm user list unless they are mapped to users provided by the external provider. all the TeleForm users remain in the system.Switch Security Providers NOTE Logging off from a module does not close that module. Rights and Security Group memberships are retained as well. External to Internal If you switch from Windows or LDAP to TeleForm’s internal security protocol. Open the Global TeleForm Settings > Security dialog box. External to External To switch from Windows to LDAP or from LDAP to Windows 1. 2. 3. Select the new external security Provider and click the Setup button. • • 114 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . but the TeleForm user names are renamed if they differ from the names used by the external security provider. See “LDAP” on page 94 and “Windows” on page 95 for instructions on configuring the security provider connections.Chapter 8 Security User rights and Security Group memberships are retained. . Instructions on configuring TeleForm to accept batches from Remote Capture Stations.  “Customize Verifier for Your Operators” on page 203. Customizing the individual Verifier workstations can substantially increase the efficiency of your system.PART 2 TeleForm Customization This section describes the different customizations available for TeleForm. It includes the following chapters:  “Remote Capture Option” on page 167. Instructions on installing the Web Capture Server and configuring TeleForm to accept batches from this server.  “Web Capture Option” on page 179. Part 2 TeleForm Customization • • 116 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Change the System Configuration CHAPTER 9 This chapter tells you how to set custom options of TeleForm such as the location of TeleForm directories. Most of these settings are controlled using the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box.  Open the Configuration controls  Global System Tab  Local System tab  Designer Tab  Reader Tab  Merge/Print Tab  Multiuser Features Tab  Configuration Options tab TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 117 • • • . character recognition thresholds. and various other initialization settings. which gives you access to the many configuration settings that define TeleForm's default behavior. the amount of disk space available. The statistical information collected can then be viewed using TeleForm’s reporting function. To open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box 1. 2. • • 118 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 3. described in “Analyze Your System Throughput” on page 295. select Configuration. 5. From the Utilities menu.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Open the Configuration controls Some Global and Local TeleForm Settings tabs are not visible if the appropriate module is not installed on the workstation from which you open the Global and Local TeleForm Settings dialog box. The Global and Local TeleForm Settings dialog box opens. Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box. Change the needed settings and click Apply. Start a TeleForm module. 4. Global System Tab The Global System tab defines how TeleForm collects statistical information and what type of form tracking is employed. because it can affect your TeleForm system dramatically. times and dates.Global System Tab Global settings apply to every form and workstation. The default language is used to determine recognition character sets as well as regional settings for currencies. For more information regarding languages and character sets. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 119 • • • . Be careful when you change a global setting. see the TeleForm User Guide. The Global System tab includes these sub-tabs:  Global System > General Tab  Global System > Security Tab  Global System > Image Storage Tab  Global System > Export Tab  Global System > Read Only Tab  Global System > Resource Checker Tab Global System > General Tab Default Language This value indicates the default language for your TeleForm system.  Enable for Pre v4. Type a value. from 1 to 60 seconds. • • 120 •• • •  Use fax as formatting device: Your default fax server is used to control the formatting of text on forms. TeleForm Administration Guide . If you are processing a large number of forms per day. field titles and labels are shown on your form in the Designer workspace and when they are printed. if you set this time to 1 minute and you have forms that take 2 minutes to evaluate or print.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Minimal tracking Select Minimal Tracking if you want TeleForm to collect only the most fundamental statistics. If full tracking is used. Incompatible with a selection of Use printer as formatting device. you may want to use Minimal Tracking to maximize the system’s speed.0 forms (labels and titles): Incompatible with a selection of Disable for all forms. or prints) need to be purged or deleted manually. Monitor reports that Reader is stalled even though it is actually evaluating a form. Disable Minimal tracking if you want TeleForm to collect all statistics. Lock timeout The period before an attempt to lock a file or record times out. all intermediate records (such as receives. sends.0 forms. The default value is 20 seconds. When minimum tracking is used. WYSIWYG Text Options The WYSIWYG text options can be updated to change the way your text boxes.  Disable for all forms (labels and titles): Incompatible with a selection of Enable for Pre v4. This is the default setting. Stall time This value specifies the time allowed to pass before TeleForm Monitor detects one of the TeleForm programs has stalled.  Use fixed character positioning in text fields: This option can be useful when you are designing a form with fonts that are not supported by TeleForm. Incompatible with a selection of Use fax as formatting device. sends or prints are deleted automatically (after the receive or print is completed). TeleForm Reader can cause invalid stall warnings if the Stall time is not long enough. Set the Stall time large enough to accommodate such cases.  Use printer as formatting device: Your default printer is used to control the formatting of text on forms. The default is 5 minutes (300 seconds). intermediate records such as receives. you allow Designer to assign fixed size values for these fonts so they can be seen more clearly.Global System Tab such as postscript fonts. Collect Verifier Statistics When enabled. For detailed information on setting up security for an Enterprise system. Enterprise Security Enterprise security is a complex subject. By enabling this option. such as postscript fonts. By enabling this option. Global System > Security Tab This tab controls the TeleForm security protocol. you allow Designer to assign fixed spacing values for these fonts so they can be seen more clearly. See the following paragraphs for information on the available settings. You can then use this data to generate charts for evaluating your Verifier operators. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 121 • • • . Workgroup Security TeleForm Workgroup offers only internal security. your TeleForm Statistics module collects statistics on Verifier performance and usage. see “Security” on page 85.  Font size modification: This option can be useful when you are designing a form with fonts that are not supported by TeleForm. For details regarding security settings. a single operator on a workstation only needs to log on once. Remember last login If you select this option.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Enable user security Click this checkbox to turn on user security. TeleForm automatically fills in the name of the last user to log on in the TeleForm Login dialog box when a new module is opened or when the Login command is started from an already-open module. See “Enable Security” on page 92 for TeleForm Enterprise security options. Single sign-on If you select this option. see “Enable Security” on page 92. Global System > Image Storage Tab Internal storage format Defines the graphic format for stored form images: • • 122 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Provider TeleForm Workgroup provides internal security only. Global System Tab  Cardiff Image Format  DCX  TIFF Uncompressed  TIFF Group 3 ID (Mod Huffman)  TIFF Group 3 Fax  TIFF Group 4  TIFF Packbits JPEG Compression Quality This setting determines the quality of JPEG files relative to their size (compression). Backup directory Defines where archived images are stored. If this field is blank. Image zone format Defines the file type for saved Image Zones. Acceptable formats:  BMP  DCX  PCX  TIFF Group 3 Fax  TIFF Group 3 ID (Mod Huffman)  TIFF Group 4  TIFF Packbits  TIFF Uncompressed TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 123 • • • . NonForm images are stored in the default directory. Values closer to 1 result in smaller files of lesser quality. NonForm image directory Defines where NonForm images are stored after processing. archived images are stored in the BAK directory. The default value is 90. The default value is TIF. Values closer to 100 result in larger files of higher quality. By default. TeleForm stores PDF files in color. Resolution You can choose to store PDF files at 200 or 300 DPI.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Save without processing When saving Image Zone images during evaluation. Global System > Export Tab Export/Commit retries This setting allows you to change the number of times the Reader automatically retries a batch commit or non-batch export if the commit/export fails. you can save the image without the preprocessing. This option is disabled by default. Treat PDF as color When checked. This setting is not dependent on the Treat PDF as color option. • • 124 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Global System > Read Only Tab This tab shows the currently enabled directories for various TeleForm functions. This tab reflects any changes that have been made to the default configuration. only allow compatible types This setting affects the Fields tab of the Auto Export Setup dialog box. When mapping fields. These settings cannot be altered. this setting defines the minimum allowed length for the data exported from any one data entry field or virtual field. When disabled. When enabled. Choice field separator This value is used to separate the choices in a multiple-choice Choice Field. The default value is 30. you can map form fields to database fields that are not strictly compatible with the data collected in the form field. It is independent of the separator used to separate each field in the record. Don't allow a batch to be committed until it is in the 'Ready to be committed' state This option was known as the “strict commit rule” in previous versions of TeleForm. it prevents any batch that is not “Ready to be committed” from being committed. Minimum VARCHAR length If you are exporting data to a VARCHAR format. even if a supervisor attempts to override the batch status. If you use primarily one database format for all of your exports. from 1 to 127. you can only map form fields to database fields that are compatible with the data collected in the form field. When enabled. Type a value. form merges and field lookups. the value of this parameter should reflect the field name length limit for that format.Global System Tab Maximum field name length Sets a limit on the length of Field IDs for data entry fields. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 125 • • • . The Resource Checker is also used to warn users of a cluster server failure event.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Global System > Resource Checker Tab This tab controls the monitoring and warning options for disk and memory space. Cluster servers are supported only for Enterprise systems. • • 126 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . There are no settings on the Global System > Resource Checker tab that affect the function of the Resource Checker in regard to cluster server events. The Resource Checker is automatically displayed in open TeleForm applications when there is insufficient disk or memory space. with the thresholds determined by the settings on this tab. If the user clicks Close. An idle module is defined as a module which is performing no tasks. TeleForm automatically checks the levels against the thresholds at the Retry interval. A warning message opens in all open TeleForm applications stating that the threshold has been exceeded. An audible beep is generated each time the check fails. a low memory/disk space message is written to the log. No other tasks can be performed in the applications until the user acknowledges the warning message. An insufficient resources warning message opens in all open TeleForm applications. No warning message is displayed and no new check of the levels performed.  Ignore. TeleForm attempts to close any module that is idle when the level is not met.  Warn. In Reader and AutoMerge Publisher.  Close when idle.Global System Tab Option This list specifies what happens if either the Disk level or the Memory level are not met:  Warn and retry. The user can use that time to perform other tasks. such as shutting down applications or freeing up resources. TeleForm automatically checks the levels against the thresholds 30 seconds later. No other tasks can be initiated on the application while the warning/ check process is underway. The type of shut down that occurs depends on the module: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 127 • • • . the application shuts down. The batch merge feature. it performs the action specified in the Option list. • • 128 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . so an AutoMerge Publisher station could conceivably remain open for some time after the automatic shutdown is triggered. Default 200 Range 20-20000 Memory level When TeleForm finds that there is not at least this much free memory space available. but close as soon as the task is completed. it performs the action specified in the Option list. Check every _ seconds The time interval at which TeleForm checks the disk and memory levels. if enabled.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Modules that require user confirmation to close (Designer. These modules do not close in the middle of a task. Default 30 Range 5-300 Disk level When TeleForm finds that there is not at least this much free disk space available. and Scan Station) generates a prompt asking the user to confirm the shutdown. Default 50 Range 5-1000 Retry If you specify Warn and retry in the Option list. this field determines how long after the original attempt the retry is performed. Verifier. treats all the jobs in the batch as a single task.  Modules that do not require user confirmation (Reader and AutoMerge Publisher) automatically shut down without any intervention by the user.  Disable audible alerts. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 129 • • • . Turns off warning beeps for TeleForm modules. Makes the TeleForm workstation capable or incapable of transmitting and receiving faxes directly.  Form cache size. and the allowed range is 1-10. This option has no effect on hard-copy faxes that are scanned into TeleForm. This setting determines the maximum number of forms that can be stored in the form cache. This setting defines how many ODBC connections TeleForm keeps open simultaneously on this workstation.Local System tab Local System tab The Local System tab defines how the specific TeleForm workstation on which you are viewing the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box functions. but are common to every module that is installed on this workstation. The default value is 4.  ODBC connection cache size. such as Designer or Reader. The functions controlled by the Local System tab are not specific to a certain TeleForm module.  Disable fax capabilities. For example. the cursor is still the Choice Field tool when you exit the Choice Field dialog box. Sticky cursors Retains the last Shape tool that was used. It includes these sub-tabs:  Designer > Local Tab  Designer > Advanced Tab  Designer > Defaults Tab Designer > Local Tab This tab defines how Designer works if it is launched on the local workstation.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Designer Tab The Designer tab controls functions specific to TeleForm Designer. a blank Traditional form is created every time Designer is launched. Create a “New” form at startup When enabled. • • 130 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . if you click the Choice Field toolbar button and create a Choice Field. Existing form background color This button allows you to select the default background color for Existing forms. Spell Checking Options The Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to change how the spell checker functions. Master selection color This setting controls the display color for the dominant object when multiple objects are selected. It should only be used on powerful computers. the Designer workspace title bar displays the Form ID and the form activation state (Draft or Activated). This list defines only the spell checking dictionary. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 131 • • • .Designer Tab Show full grid This option fills the entire workspace grid with dots. The default is English (American). Spell check language Defines what “root” language dictionary is used to check the spelling on your forms. The default Existing form background color is gray. not any Recognition Aid dictionaries. Show Form ID and state in title With this option enabled. Selection handle size This setting determines the size of the “grab handles” that are shown when an object or multiple objects are selected. you are able to edit and save an activated form without giving it a new name or assigning it a new Form ID. Designer permits the copying of bitmaps and/or metafiles to the Windows clipboard.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Group selection color This setting determines the color of the “box” drawn to indicate the boundary of the selection area when multiple objects are selected. This command is designed to fix some common user and system errors. even if the changes you made would ordinarily have required you to save it with a different name and Form ID.  Skip 'Save As' dialog for activated forms. The new form would then need to be activated. For details on what Validate Files does. TeleForm Administration Guide . When enabled.  Validate files at next startup. When enabled. TeleForm runs the Validate Files command the next time Designer is started. When enabled. Designer > Advanced Tab • • 132 •• • •  Copy bitmaps / metafiles to clipboard with Edit/Copy. see “Validate Files” on page 273.  User Entry: When this option is selected. if you selected a Constrained Print Field and deleted it.000. This Form ID must conform to the applicable ID range (standard or extended) that is in effect. You can limit the number of steps that can be undone in Designer by typing a value in this field.  Maximum undos. Limiting the number of steps that can be undone can improve system performance. This field defines the default Shape Library file. VersiForm. If you find yourself continually changing these settings on a  form-by-form basis. you can save time in the future by modifying the start-up defaults. since storing Selection commands consumes additional memory. but the Designer can override this value.  Random: TeleForm automatically assigns non-sequential Form ID values to new forms. Standard ID Range These numbers define the valid Form ID range for Traditional forms and VersiForms. Form ID Assignment These fields determine how TeleForm assigns Form ID values to new forms. form designers can type a Form ID value in the Save As dialog box. When enabled. this option includes Selection commands in the Undo/Redo queue. Existing) has a Form ID that is incremented sequentially from the last form created of that type. since fewer steps must be stored in memory.000 to 16.  Sequential: Each new form of the same type (Traditional. clicking the Undo button twice would undo both the deletion of the field and the selection of it. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 133 • • • . TeleForm provides a Form ID by default. The valid range is 100. For example.000.000. The valid range is 2 to 65.Designer Tab  Default Shape library.  Show selection changes in undo. A value of 0 places no limits on the number of steps that can be undone. Designer > Defaults Tab This dialog box defines Designer settings that are automatically used for new forms. This option is disabled by default. Extended ID Range These numbers define the acceptable Form ID values for Traditional and Existing forms that are created with the Extended Form ID Range option enabled.  Reference mark margins.  Entry/Choice shape. Reader Tab The Reader tabs control functions specific to TeleForm Reader. You can still modify the size of any specific CPF after it is created. They specify the distance from the edge of the paper to the outermost edge of the cornerstones. This option allows you to set the shape of the bubbles that make up the global entry/choice field when the default is selected in draw options. TeleForm sets this value to an oval. The width of lines/boxes/ovals in evaluation objects. which use solid cornerstones as Form ID marks. This tab includes these sub-tabs: • • 134 •• • •  Reader > Local Tab  Reader > Identification Tab  Reader > Recognition tab  Reader > OCR Performance tab TeleForm Administration Guide .  Line Width. By default. These settings apply only to Traditional forms.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Constrained print dimensions. These settings affect the size of Constrained Print Fields when they are created. If a task is run but finds nothing to do (e.g.Reader Tab  Reader > Image Handling tab  Reader > General Tab Reader > Local Tab This tab defines how Reader works if it is launched on the workstation from which the tab is opened. Disabling evaluations and form identification can be useful if you want to stack-up images in the receive log for later processing. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 135 • • • . Enables or prevents a Reader from evaluating and identifying forms. Tasks After you select an option from the Tasks list. The brief delay allows other tasks to be run in the interim (this delay is typically less than a second. the task is scheduled to begin again almost immediately. When a task finishes its current job. The tasks include:  Evaluation/Identification. the evaluation queue is empty). but depends upon the task). The Check every __ seconds value is the maximum time between checks. you must also click the Enable check box and set a time period (or a Schedule). it schedules the next start using the Check every __ seconds period. When enabled.  Batch page link. This option allows your TeleForm system to define a batch as being “Ready to commit” even if it contains multiple page forms that are missing pages. • • 136 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . which can help you determine if your global or field-level image preprocessing settings are appropriate. you can specify a certain form that uses this feature. Do evaluations in background thread This option is enabled by default. which can slow down the verification process. TeleForm does not wait for the remaining pages to be received. Display All Evaluation Zones This feature shows the results of image preprocessing in each field. Only one Reader station should have the Batch distribution feature enabled. If it is set to one day. Reader. If you do not choose a form. TeleForm exports all forms with missing pages. rather than waiting for an image to identify/evaluate. Allows Reader to automatically commit batches when they have been flagged as “Ready for Commit.  Non-batch export. With this option enabled. Allows Reader to automatically attempt to link missing page forms within batches.) field.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Distribution. it might be two days before data export (if a form comes in late in the day). Load Engines at Startup. exports data from non-batch forms with a status of “Evaluated OK.  Missing page batch commit. In the Form section. Choose your missing page export time carefully. Specifies how often Reader station checks its internal queue for new images to distribute. The default is 2 seconds. It should be disabled on all other Readers.”  Missing page export. This option forces Reader to export non-batch processed forms with missing pages after a specific period of time has elapsed. Reader loads its recognition engines when the program is launched. You can change the time to display the evaluation zone by entering a value in the Zone display time (sec. rather than Verifier.  Batch commit.” This setting eliminates the need for Verifier workstations to manually commit batches. 1:8.  NonForm if confidence less than this. The default is 1:1. 1:2.Reader Tab You can also set the scale in the Zone display mode field. Reader > Identification Tab Existing/VersiForm confidence There are two settings that determine how confident TeleForm Reader must be before it can identify an image either as a specific form or as a NonForm. 1:4. This setting defines how confident Reader must be that an Existing or VersiForm form image matches a form template in the Recognition Set. NOTE Using the Display all evaluation zones setting during normal processing slows the evaluation process considerably. Autonomy Cardiff recommends that this option be used for form design testing purposes. This setting affects how each zone is displayed in Reader. Acceptable ranges are: 1:1. If the confidence is less than this value when TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 137 • • • . IMPORTANT Changing the NonForm confidence affects the identification of ALL Existing forms and VersiForms. or Fit Vertically. Fit Horizontally.  Maximum horizontal and vertical offset and shrink. The match confidence percentage is based on how many Identification Lines and Reference Blocks are found on the image.  Max Offset. This is measured as a percentage of the original size. you can lower the NonForm confidence. These values determine how far the data entry fields and objects on a form can shift and still be found and identified by Reader. The default is 80. This value determines how confident Reader must be of the relationship between a form image and a form template before it can identify the form image as the specific form. Limit The Limit list defines the maximum number or percentage for the following functions:  Maximum enabled forms. If the confidence is greater than this value.  Shrink Factor.  Match if confidence is greater than this. If an image is frequently classified as a NonForm when it is really a form.  If all lines/blocks are found. Doing so may increase the number of images that are identified as the wrong form. it is classified as a NonForm. the form has a confidence rating of 100. This value is the maximum amount of shrinkage that the objects on the form can undergo and still be recognized. • • 138 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The default is 10 percent. you could raise this value to reduce the chance that an image is classified as the wrong form. then you can increase the NonForm confidence to reduce the number of incorrectly identified forms. If a NonForm is frequently identified as a form. For example:  If no lines/blocks are found. The default setting is 1. The default setting is 50. as based on the form template. Doing so may increase the number of valid form images that are classified as NonForms. The downside of increasing this value is that the identification process takes longer because the image must be compared against more forms before it is identified. Maximum number of forms that can be enabled in the Recognition Set at one time. it is identified as the form that has the highest confidence value.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration compared against all the forms in the Recognition Set. If the forms in your Recognition Set are similar. the form has a zero confidence rating. This value is the largest distance that the text and fields can shift together from their original location and still be found.0 inch. Check for Flipped Forms Enables checking for flipped VersiForms or Existing forms. This number can be increased to create more blocks in case any had to be disabled on the form because they were drawn around data fields.Reader Tab  Max reference marks per quadrant. This setting applies to Traditional forms only. This setting designates the maximum number of identification blocks that TeleForm assigns to any quadrant (quarter) of the form page. If enabled. This setting determines how far an Explicit ID field can be from its anticipated location before Reader defines the image as a NonForm. Defines the minimum number of bar marks. It determines the maximum distance (in 1/1000's of an inch) of a reference mark from its expected location. the image is treated as a NonForm. or “ticks. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 139 • • • .  Minimum bars (NCS style forms). The default is 3. This setting defines how different in size a Traditional form ID block can be from its expected size before Reader identifies the image as a NonForm.  Reference mark tolerance.” that Reader must find on an Existing form to identify it as an NCS-style form. tick mark columns or rows are grouped into identification blocks. Range: 200-3000 (1/1000’s of an inch) Default: 1500 (1/1000’s of an inch)  Explicit ID Location Padding. Use Drop-In identification This list determines when Reader uses any drop-in identification system to identify a form. Should only be disabled if you are sure that all forms are evaluated top edge first. If the reference marks are found further away from their expected locations than the Reference Mark Tolerance. Enable NCS style forms Enable the recognition engine to identify the tick marks found in NCS or Scantron style forms.  Maximum size error for Traditional ID blocks. rather than its normal method of identifying forms by ID marks. all Attachment options are disabled and all images are evaluated as page one of the form. If an image does not match the template of any of the Traditional forms or one of the forms in the recognition set. If you select a form. This option is designed primarily for complete dropout forms.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Evaluate all forms as Select a form from the list if you want to force all images to be identified as page 1 of the selected form. The value of 'Keep Pages Together' affects whether such a script is run once for each page or once for a group of NonForm pages processed together. Evaluate NonForms as Select a form from the list if you want all NonForm images to be evaluated as page 1 of the selected form. One purpose for this entry is to allow a script to run each time a NonForm is processed. Forms must be scanned top-first. that image is identified as a NonForm/ Attachment. You should only select this option if you want every NonForm image to be evaluated using a specific form template. Any images being evaluated that are not identified as being associated with a particular form are evaluated as if they were the first page of the form with this ID. Reader > Recognition tab This tab affects the behavior of TeleForm Reader and Verifier. • • 140 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The default value is 10. You can experiment with different levels to find the optimal value for your particular purpose. The allowable range is 1-1000.Reader Tab Character Recognition You can modify the following Character Recognition thresholds. The system-level threshold value at or above which characters are considered to have been evaluated correctly.  Confidence threshold. This is the difference between seeing a “~” and a guess for the character.  Setting a lower confidence threshold rejects fewer characters (holding for verification less often) but may have more substitution errors.  Constrained print fill threshold.  Best guess threshold. but rejects a higher percentage of characters as ambiguous and needing verification. The default threshold value is 10. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 141 • • • . The default confidence threshold used when you first install TeleForm is 80.  Setting a higher confidence threshold reduces the incidence of substitution characters. This option allows you to set the system-level threshold at which a character's best guess is used if the character did not interpret OK. This setting defines the number of pixels in a Constrained Print Field box needed to consider the box filled. The acceptable range is from 1 to 99.The acceptable range is from 1 to 99.  Mark fill adjustment. This setting defines the percentage BELOW which a response mark is considered EMPTY. Configures the maximum number of pixels that can be detected in an Image Zone for it to be considered blank. However. you can modify this threshold if needed. This setting defines the percentage ABOVE which a response mark is considered MARKED. The default value is 32 pixels.  Mark fill high. any Response Mark covered by more than 40% is considered marked. as TeleForm Reader must search for the “most centered” line of text in an Image Zone. The allowable range is 2 (1/2 inch) to 64 (1/64 inch). OMR Recognition These options allow you to set up the OMR (mark). you can modify this threshold if needed. OMR Recognition settings are used only when field and form level settings are not specified. The single line extraction function is required for some special Image Zone formatting features.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Image zone fill threshold. recognition settings for all forms in your TeleForm system. response marks that are less than 25% covered is considered empty. By default. This setting affects the precision of the Extract Text feature in Designer. By default. Also. These settings maintain how “filled” a bubble has to be in order to be considered marked. TeleForm Administration Guide . Skip blank constrained print fields and image zones Skips evaluation of Constrained Print fields when all characters have a pixel count less than the Constraint print fill threshold value. described above.  Image extraction tolerance. The allowable range is 2 (height of character divided by 2) to 64 (height of character divided by 64).  Character extraction tolerance. If the Entry Field uses the Value in bubble option. but may be unnecessary for TeleForm applications that do not require Image Zone values to be formatted in these ways. You can modify the following OMS settings: • • 142 •• • •  Mark fill low. Also skips evaluation of Image zones when they have a pixel count less than the Image zone fill threshold described above. However. the Mark Fill Adjustment determines how much of these internal values to remove. Disable single line extraction Image Zones can be configured to extract only a single line of text. single line Image Zone extraction can slow the recognition process. This setting affects the precision of the Extract Bitmap feature in Designer. It is an option for Existing forms. This threshold is controlled only from the Global Settings > Reader > Recognition tab. TeleForm holds all returned forms for review in TeleForm Verifier. You can choose any printable ASCII character. regardless of whether or not they are interpreted with errors. New fields that are being searched for query the lattice to fine-tune the start location used for detailed location and preprocessing functions. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 143 • • • .Reader Tab This option only takes effect if the values are printed in non-dropout ink. and then marks the correct answer.  Mark fill maximum threshold. The system can be configured to determine which response mark should be recognized as the right answer if two marks have been covered.  Mark size tolerance. scribbles it out. The lattice is built as lines and fields are found on the form. Mark all forms for review When this option is enabled. which means:  The maximum expected size of any response mark is 15% larger in every dimension  The maximum expected size of any response mark is 15% smaller in every dimension Low confidence character This option allows you to set the character that is substituted for unrecognizable characters by the recognition engine. the Location lattice is enabled for Traditional and VersiForms. The incorrect answer is typically more covered than the correct one. This character should be a special character that indicates to the Verifier operator that it must be reviewed. The setting at which a mark is considered “scribbled out” is the Mark Fill Max Threshold. By default. because dropout values does not result in unmarked responses being evaluated as marked. Location lattice use The Location lattice feature uses detailed information from the found location of each line and field on the form to help locate additional fields more accurately. Such an event would normally happen if someone chooses an incorrect answer. It defines the maximum and minimum difference between the expected size of a response mark and the actual size of the mark as evaluated by TeleForm Reader. The default value is 15. The technology used to read and convert machine-printed text from a graphical image format to an editable text format. • • 144 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The Optimized for accuracy setting is the slowest of the three. The three performance settings allow you to balance speed and accuracy. such as Constrained Print Fields and Image Zones that collect machine print characters. The Balance speed and accuracy setting (default) strives to achieve a mix of speed and accuracy. evaluation.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Reader > OCR Performance tab This tab affects how TeleForm Reader evaluates fields that require OCR (Optical Character Recognition). but can reasonably be expected to result in the fewest errors. Reader > Image Handling tab This tab determines what happens to multi-page forms and NonForms when they are received. The Optimized for speed setting can reasonably be expected to result in more errors but to require less time. if page one has a value of XYZ and page 2 has a value of ?YZ the character pairs are (X. Characters above the confidence threshold must match. Y). but characters below the confidence threshold can be different. If all character pairs match and the confidence of all characters is greater than the defined confidence threshold.” A character pair is formed by taking one character from the same position in the field on each page being compared. For instance. You can choose from these Page link rule options:  All Characters match.  All characters match. Z). (Y. the pages are linked.  High confidence characters must match. If all character pairs match and the confidence of all characters is greater than the defined best guess threshold. the pages are linked. ?). and (Z. best guess OK. you can select the best method that each character matches a particular threshold. The best guest threshold is defined in the Character recognition section on the Recognition tab. evaluated OK. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 145 • • • .Reader Tab Page link rule When linking pages with Page Link fields. Only one can be selected at a time. Page linking is based on the concept of “character pairs. Select this option if you want TeleForm to discard images that are identified as NonForms. that image is identified as a NonForm\Attachment. NonForms are discarded when the batch is committed. Only link forms with page link and/or user ID fields Choose this option if you do not want TeleForm to link pages that don't have a page link or User ID field. These images are separate from the form images and are not attached to any forms. Print forms with missing pages Enabling this option forces TeleForm to print forms with missing pages.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Only link pages that are in same image or scan Choose this option if you want to link pages only when they are part of the same image or scan.  Save adjacent pages together. a portion of the form may get printed twice.  Attach to adjacent forms. this setting prevents any pages from linking within batches. NonForm image handling If an image does not match the template of one of the forms in the Recognition Set. Select this option to store adjacent NonForms in a single image file. Choose from these options:  Do not save. These options ONLY take effect when the NonForm is not part of a batch. just in case one or more of these NonForms comes from your fax server. If you are not using batch processing. If you enable this option. TeleForm automatically prints any NonForms in your system. TeleForm Administration Guide .” and that form later becomes complete. The Non-batch options list defines how TeleForm handles such NonForms. Note that AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForms to print. NonForms are not attached to forms. If used with batch processing. NonForms are discarded as soon as they are identified. The NonForm handling for batch images is controlled by the Form ID Attachments settings of the job that is used for the batch. Enable this option if NonForm pages are to be kept together with form pages in the same image file. If this option is enabled when a form is initially evaluated as “missing pages. Select this option to store NonForms in a separate file. If you are using batch processing. • • 146 •• • •  Save each page separately. Note that AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForm images to print. Print if not attached Enable this option to print NonForms that are not attached to forms. Note that AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForm images to print. even those that are attached to forms. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 147 • • • . this setting links the cover sheet to the form. even those that are attached to forms. this setting prints all NonForm images. It is only available if you select the Attach to adjacent forms option from the Non-batch option list. NOTE If you are using batch processing. To save NonForms even if they are not adjacent to forms choose Attach NonForms to adjacent forms and select the Save unattached option. If the form is faxed with a cover sheet.Reader Tab NOTE This setting is primarily designed for forms that are faxed into TeleForm. Save unattached This option forces TeleForm to save all NonForm images that are not attached to forms. this setting saves all NonForm images. If you are using batch processing. and may require a large amount of disk space. Collecting these statistics can greatly slow down form evaluation in your Reader stations. NOTE Remember that you only want to collect Reader field statistics while optimizing a form or forms. you must enable this option. • • 148 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Autonomy recommends that you specify a single form on which this option is performed. make sure that you clear the Collect Reader field statistics check box when you are done optimizing that form. not while processing. Collect Reader field statistics If you need to collect detailed field statistics. Collecting detailed field statistics for all your forms can slow down your system considerably.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Reader > General Tab Collect Reader statistics If you want to collect Reader statistics. In addition. make sure that you only do so while you are optimizing a single form. Form If you enable the Collect Reader field statistics option. X. if Reader is attempting to evaluate a file named 123. it cannot determine the format of the file from the X extension. The Evaluation override format is used similarly to proxy file identification. all file evaluations are distributed. TeleForm leaves NonForm faxes in the fax server queue after evaluation. For example. Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate) When enabled. When disabled. images are queued in memory. Evaluation override format Reader uses this format to evaluate an image if the “true” identity of the image cannot be determined from the file's extension. This option has no effect in multi-user TeleForm systems. files selected for evaluation are queued in the form log (distributed).Reader Tab Collect NonForm identification information When enabled. In this case. Reader saves debugging information for NonForm images in the file named TELEFORM. This setting is ignored in an TeleForm system with more than one workstation license. Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue (if supported) When enabled. This feature applies to Traditional forms only.NFS. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 149 • • • . High speed merge The High Speed Merge option can decrease the time needed to merge forms. It also pre-loads forms in the queue to reduce waiting time. AutoMerge Publisher can initiate a merge every 20 seconds. By default. You can change this range to be anywhere from 5 to 3600 seconds in the Forms to merge every _ seconds setting in the Queues section. the AutoMerge Publisher keeps merging forms until there are no more records.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Merge/Print Tab This tab defines how forms and images are printed from AutoMerge Publisher. Enable print and send This option allows TeleForm applications to print and fax forms and images. The speed of the printing and sending function is defined by the Forms to print & send every _ seconds setting in the Queues section. • • 150 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . If you enable this option. Enable merges This option allows you to enable the AutoMerge Publisher form merges. When enabled. you can distribute merged forms and documents. It also controls certain aspects of the merge function. but the merge job uses a cover sheet. This setting DOES NOT affect batch processing in Reader and Verifier. Templates are excluded for the following reasons:  The template has an image zone that has the "store image" property checked  The template has a non-standard page definition (i. but you do not output as many forms as you might anticipate. IMPORTANT Certain form templates are not eligible for batch merging and will always be sent as separate print jobs. rather than treating each form as a separate job. Batch merging This function works with printed merge jobs. you print only 50 merged forms per batched print job.Multiuser Features Tab The number of pre-loaded merge forms is defined by the Preload up to _ forms per merge check cycle setting in the Queues section. This option bases the merge queue on the merge job priority set in AutoMerge Publisher. Allowable values are 2 to 100. You must also define a Maximum batch size at the bottom of the dialog box.e. If your merge job uses a cover sheet. It combines several forms into one print job. each cover sheet is treated as 1 item in the batched print job. The allowable range is 2 to 100 forms. Your merge is still faster than if you did not enable Batch Merging. if you set your Maximum batch size to 100. The size of batch merge jobs is constrained by the Maximum batch size setting in the Queues section. Priority based queuing Merges can be created with different priorities. It includes these tabs:  Multiuser Features > General Tab  Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 151 • • • . variable or multiple copies) Multiuser Features Tab The Multiuser Features tab controls functions specific to Enterprise and Workgroup systems. For example. ranging from 0 (highest priority) to 255 (lowest priority).  The Web Settings tab is only visible if you are using the Web Capture Option.  The Remote Settings tab is only visible if you are using the Remote Capture Option. Multiuser Features > General Tab • • 152 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support  Multiuser Features > Compliance Support  Multiuser Features > Encryption  Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab  Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab Conditional Tabs  The Server Cluster Support tab is available only for Enterprise systems. since TeleForm Workgroup does not operate in a cluster server environment. Compress . since TeleForm must scan the auto-assign queue for “fresh” batches. Enable script caching Selecting the Enable script caching check box speeds up the processing of forms if they contain form scripts.Multiuser Features Tab Single Reader per batch When multiple Readers are evaluating images from the same batch at the same time.RES file Choosing this option compresses the files that contain the results of the Reader evaluation. By enabling the Cache the auto-assign queue option. Maximum users per batch This setting defines how many Verifier operators are allowed to perform correction on any given batch at the same time.This check box should always be selected. all batches that are ready for further processing are loaded into the queue. It defines how often TeleForm re-examines the list of batches that require processing. Cache the auto-assign queue When the Auto Batch Assign function is being used to provide Verifier operators with batches to process. some lag between when a batch has finished one processing stage and when it is available for another may result. The Reader evaluates each page in the order in which it was scanned. For faster processing this option should always be enabled. The queue is reloaded at the interval specified in the Auto-assign queue refresh field. so that operators who are using the auto-assign function can be provided with “fresh” batches. which reduces the size of files that need to be transferred over the Server and network. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 153 • • • . Auto-assign queue refresh This field is only editable when the Cache the auto-assign queue option is enabled. resulting in more “ready” batches. This situation can be avoided by only allowing one Reader to evaluate the batch. so each page is linked to the nearest page of the same form. multi-page forms may be linked incorrectly. Do ALL non-batch exports from Reader This setting allows Verifier workstations to cue non-batch forms for export by Reader. Your Verifier stations is not slowed by the need to export data from non-batch forms. The Resource Checker automatically closes when the failure has been addressed and the server is online. If a monitored cluster server notifies TeleForm that a failure event has occurred. • • 154 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . you can save different versions of forms and Shape Library files (. See “Revision Control” on page 259 for detailed instructions.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab This dialog box connects your TeleForm system to revision control software. Your revision control software must already be installed and functional before you can link it to TeleForm. When enabled. It is not available on the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box for Workgroup systems.GLS) to your revision control system. Revision control in TeleForm is a complex subject. the Resource Checker is automatically displayed at all TeleForm modules. Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support This tab is available only for TeleForm Enterprise systems. This warning notifies TeleForm operators that processing has been paused because the cluster is switching to a backup node. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 155 • • • . The Resource name field identifies the resource name assigned by the SQL cluster server. File Server Cluster Support This option should be enabled if you have installed the TeleForm application itself to a cluster server. When this option is enabled. It should NOT be enabled if your SQL database is deployed in a non-cluster environment. this field reads “SQL Server. TeleForm automatically displays the Resource Checker dialog box when a failure event occurs at the cluster server hosting the TeleForm MS SQL database.Multiuser Features Tab SQL Cluster Support This option should be enabled if you have installed the TeleForm MS SQL database on a cluster server. It should NOT be enabled if you have installed TeleForm in a non-cluster environment.” This field cannot be edited. When this option is enabled. By default. TeleForm automatically displays the Resource Checker dialog box when a failure event occurs at the cluster server on which TeleForm was installed. or batch that the operator has already processed. any one Verifier operator is prevented from performing Data Review on a batch that the operator has already corrected. form.). 1 Basic logging.log. Security Settings  Enable double key validation. tfreader_01. Compliance systems should ensure that the same Verifier operator does not perform Double Key Validation on a data entry field. Refer to the Enterprise System Management Guide for detailed information on creating a compliant TeleForm system. which covers these Success events:  Logging the start/stop of the TeleForm monitoring thread  Logging which resources are monitored 2 Cluster server events.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Diagnostic Logging The Diagnostic Logging feature tracks cluster events for the monitored cluster servers (both SQL and file servers) and TeleForm commands related to those events. This dialog box controls TeleForm's compliance-related settings. Data Review is the Verifier Mode in which Double Key Validation takes place. Logging can interfere with the actual processing of the events. In other words. Tracked events are written to the relevant application log file (tfdesign_01. Multiuser Features > Compliance Support Enterprise-only. IMPORTANT Autonomy recommends that Level 2 be avoided unless you are attempting to diagnose problems. one Verifier operator should not be responsible for performing the original work and double-checking it. etc. When you select this option. Level 0 No logging (except for an initial error if no cluster is detected or trouble connecting to the cluster).log. • • 156 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . No logging is performed.Multiuser Features Tab If this option is cleared. Open Report Generator at least once to create the required tables.  Warning text. If you want to warn TeleForm operators that you are treating their TeleForm Login as a digital signature. This warning opens when a module is launched even if you select Single sign-on. You must provide appropriate warnings that you are treat a login as a digital signature if you select the Enable digital signature warning option. especially in large systems. Optimal logging plus tracks data changes made in Verifier. You cannot generate an Audit Trail report. The Audit logging level determines how much logging activity is performed. Report Settings Report Generator can pull data from the live TeleForm database as well as an off-line (Archive) database. Using Data Transformation Services.  Optimal Logging. Refer to the Enterprise System Management Guide for more information on this option. Minimal logging plus all user and system actions. Audit Log Settings The Audit Trail is a report available only for Enterprise customers.  Enable digital signature warning.  Minimal Logging. select this option and type an appropriate message in the Warning text field. operator login and logoff. except changing individual data elements in the fields. TeleForm allows a Verifier operator to perform Data Review on a batch that the operator has already corrected. The synch operation between the live TeleForm database and the off-line database usually do not have a discernible performance effect. Module start up and shut down.  No Logging. create a DTS Package with the following tables from the TeleForm database:  Tfuser  Tfvfstat  Tfrdstat  Tfrfstat TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 157 • • • . Synching Live and Offline Databases 1. High audit levels may impact system performance. Maximum Logging can negatively impact system performance.  Maximum Logging. DSN=MyDSN. All files stored on the TeleForm Server (or under the TeleForm directory on a single-user system) will be encrypted.  ODBC Data Source Provider=MSDASQL.User ID='MyID'.Initial Catalog='MyDatabase'.Trusted_Connection=Yes  OLEDB (Direct Server) connection Provider=SQLOLEDB.Data Source='MyServer'. NOTE This feature is only available for the Enterprise product level.Integrated Security='SSPI’ Multiuser Features > Encryption The Encrypt internal data and images configuration option prevents unauthorized users from viewing images and RES files outside of TeleForm. Log in to TeleForm as an administrator and configure the Data warehouse connect string.PWD=MyPassword  ODBC Data Source with SQL Integrated Security: Provider=MSDASQL.UID=MyUID. • • 158 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .DSN=MyDSN. Companies that process forms containing credit card information often a requirement to protect the information while it is being processed.Password='MyPWD'  OLEDB (Direct Server) connection with SQL integrated Security: Provider=SQLOLEDB.Data Source='MyServer'. One of the requirements is to encrypt any files containing sensitive information when they are stored on disk (in-memory information does not need to be encrypted).Initial Catalog='MyDatabase'.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration  Tfbatmt  Tfidtbl  Tfauditbatch  Tfauditform  Tfaudituser  Tfauditworkstation  TfauditImage  Tfauditlog 2.  When encryption is enabled. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 159 • • • . the user will not be able to open the images or the RES files outside of TeleForm. It is recommend that this setting not be used when encryption is enabled. See “Synchronization Directory Setup” on page 172 for instructions on using these controls. Select where the key is stored.  Encryption algorithm. If you have selected Encrypt Images and Data Files. Select the hash algorithm to use. the system setting for image zone format will be hard coded to be the encrypted image format. 2. Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab This tab affects the function of the Remote Capture Option. When this is enabled. You have a Remote Capture Option license in your TeleForm license database. NOTE Text output files from image zones will not be encrypted.  A user can still configure image zones to output to an unencrypted format using the field level setting  If the image clip needs to be converted. then this is the number of encryption keys stored. but this feature will ensure they are encrypted. You open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box from a Scan Station or Reader station.  Key storage. a function is available in VBA to do this. Image zone output Image clips are stored in the <TeleForm>\Img directory.  Hash algorithm.  Keys stored. Select the encryption algorithm to use. It is only visible when: 1.Multiuser Features Tab NOTE RES files were already compressed by default and were not easily readable. The options available in the Multiuser Features > Encryption tab are the following:  Encrypt Images and Data Files. See “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions on using these controls. It is only visible when: 1. • • 160 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2. You open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box from a Scan Station or Reader station. You have a Web Capture Option license in your TeleForm license database.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab This tab affects the function of the Web Capture Option. Multiuser Features Tab TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 161 • • • . The available configuration options are described below. To set a configuration option back to its default value. The flag settings are as follows: • • 162 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 4. 3. Select the Option you want to change.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration Configuration Options tab The Configuration Options tab allows you to change the value of miscellaneous settings for this workstation. 2. Click Apply and OK. This option allows you to set a flag determining batches to be skipped in auto-assign processing for the current Verifier operator. click Restore Defaults. To change configuration settings: 1. Batch Auto Assign Skip Flags Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within Verifier. all scripts (e.5. This option enables you to run the BasicScript editor. system. This option should only be disabled when attempting to diagnose a problem that may be related to script use. Clear And Key Virtuals Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within Verifier. Disable Background Form Loads Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within Verifier. export) are permitted to run.g. Enable scripts When enabled. When not checked. This option is enabled by default. As of TeleForm version 10. correction begins after one form is loaded and the remaining forms load in the background. When checked.Configuration Options tab 1 Skip if nothing to review (default) 2 Skip if missing pages 4 Skip only if missing pages You may set multiple options by adding values. This option is checked by default. form. VBA and BasicScript require an additional license. For example. a setting of 3 would indicate that batches should be skipped if there is nothing to review or there are missing pages. this option loads all forms in Verifier before beginning correction. Enable BasicScript Editor BasicScript was replaced by VBA as the default scripting language for TeleForm as of v9. This option clears data from virtual fields when the Clear and Key option is implemented. Contact your Autonomy representative for more information.2. Explicit ID Performance The Value setting defines the Explicit ID performance level (0 by default): TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 163 • • • . TeleForm right-justifies all numeric values.Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration 0 Optimize for speed 1 Balance for speed and accuracy 2 Optimize for accuracy Form Selection Config Override Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within Verifier. This option is enabled by default. This function is especially helpful with dollar amounts. Valid values are 200. 300 or 400 (200 by default). This option specifies the number of images to pre-load in Verifier at one time. Stacked Config Pages This option displays the configuration tabs in a stacked format. Verifier Preloads Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within Verifier. Hide Default Job The Default Job will not be available for selection during batch creation. users are required to choose one of the custom jobs. The default value is 5. The range is 1-20. since it aligns the decimal points. This option allows users to configure the Form Selection dialog box even if they do not have configure rights. • • 164 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The default font is Arial. This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default. Capture Entry Font Name This option defines the font for Capture Zone data entry fields. Generate Wallpaper Resolution The Value setting defines the resolution for background images on Existing forms. Right Justify Numerics When enabled. Configuration Options tab TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 165 • • • . Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration • • 166 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . See “Web Capture Option” on page 179 for information on the Web Capture Option.  Important Remote Capture Station Concepts  Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm  Configuration Steps  Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations Important Remote Capture Station Concepts Understanding the following concepts and terms make it easier to configure and use the Remote Capture Option:  Remote batch directory  Synchronization directory  DSS Files TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 167 • • • . These two modules allow operators who are not physically located “within” a TeleForm system to supply that system with batches. This chapter covers only the Remote Capture Option. Remote Capture Option CHAPTER 10 Both the Remote Capture Option and Web Capture Option are designed to expand TeleForm’s sources of batched images and data. This XML file contains any data collected about the batch. If you use both these options. RCS modules supply batches to TeleForm using a Remote Batch Directory. typically located on the same network • • 168 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Both the Remote Capture Option and the Web Capture Option use a Synchronization directory. The DSS file is a compressed “package” that includes the batch images and an XML file. Each Remote Capture Station must have its own unique subdirectory in the root Remote batch directory. you MUST have at least two distinct Synchronization directories:  one for Remote Capture  a second for Web Capture DSS Files When a Remote Capture Station submits a batch. it actually transmits a DSS file to the Remote batch directory. such as index and tracking information. Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm The following illustration explains the relationship between Remote Capture Stations (RCS) and the home TeleForm site. Synchronization directory The Synchronization directory is the storage location for TeleForm Job Settings used by Remote Capture Stations.Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option Remote batch directory The Remote batch directory is the storage location to which Remote Capture Stations submit their batches. These Job Settings control the processing of batches created by RCS operators. TeleForm supplies Job Settings to the Remote Capture Stations.Configuration Steps as TeleForm itself. The remote workstations that run RCS modules require the installation of software. Remote Capture Stations 2 shown for clarity. which is covered in the Remote Capture Station User Guide. In turn. more possible RCS 1 Job Settings downloaded by RCS Batches uploaded to TeleForm RCS 2 Remote Batch Directory Synchronization Directory Job Settings Scan Station or Reader Control Center TeleForm also supplies Remote Capture Stations with confirmation messages indicating whether batches created by an RCS module were successfully transferred to TeleForm. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 169 • • • . Configuration Steps There is no setup or installation program required at the home TeleForm site to use Remote Capture Stations. Define Your Connection Protocol You must decide how to connect your Remote Capture Stations to the home TeleForm site before proceeding.  Directory. requires a user name and password.5  Windows 2003. When using this option.0. This directory must not require a user name or password for access. Create Directories 4. 7. Add a Remote Capture Station License 2. contact Cardiff Sales to purchase the appropriate license. A network connection. unlike the Directory option. It must be shared so that Remote Capture Stations have read/write access to it. Remote Capture Stations need to read information FROM this directory and write information TO it. you must specify the Remote batch directory or the Synchronization directory with a UNC path. Your TeleForm License Code may already support the Remote Capture Station option. the TeleForm system manager must perform certain administrative steps at the home TeleForm site before ANY Remote Capture Stations are installed at remote workstations. • • 170 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The Remote Capture Station currently supports:  IIS 6. See “Manage Licenses” on page 75 for information on adding TeleForm licenses. You can combine these connection protocols. Define Your Connection Protocol 3. 2008 R2 Server TeleForm does not include any FTP software. if it does not. Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings Add a Remote Capture Station License A Remote Capture Station license is required in order to run Remote Capture Stations. 7. Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent 7.0. your organization must set up its own FTP site and procedures. 2008.Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option However. The following connection options are available:  FTP.  Network. Synchronization Directory Setup 5. Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches 6. These steps are: 1. create a base Remote batch directory. IMPORTANT If you are also using Web Capture Option. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 171 • • • . so long as it can be accessed by the Remote Capture Stations and the TeleForm Reader stations that process the batches. the subdirectories for Remote Capture MUST be different from the directories used for Web Capture.  Some RCS stations may connect to the home TeleForm site via FTP while others use the Network method. Create Directories TeleForm interacts with Remote Capture Stations through special directories:  Remote batch directory  One subdirectory for each Remote Capture Station in the Remote batch directory  Synchronization directory These directories must be created through Windows Explorer before you can configure TeleForm to use them. To create a directory for the TeleForm Remote Capture Station 1. This directory can be located anywhere. 2. Using Windows Explorer or another browsing tool.Configuration Steps  The Remote batch directory can be accessed through a different protocol than the Synchronization directory. Create subdirectories within the base Remote batch directory for every Remote Capture Station. initiated at individual Remote Capture Stations.  This directory should be located on a server. The Synchronization command. To configure directory synchronization 1. for example. The rules for its location are identical to that for the Remote batch directory.Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option IMPORTANT These subdirectories MUST match the Workstation Names defined during the local Remote Capture Station installations. you should use these names for the subfolders. They must manually type the appropriate subfolder name in the Workstation Name screen during the local installation.  The Synchronization directory is the location where Job Settings are posted at the home site. • • 172 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . click Configuration. RCS stations download these Job Settings to ensure that all “batch creation” points in the TeleForm system use common batch processing settings. open the Remote Settings tab. 2. 3. the confirmation messages are downloaded from the RCS-specific subfolder of the Remote batch directory. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module. Create a Synchronization directory. Synchronization Directory Setup The synchronization directory is a central repository for job settings created at the home TeleForm site. Remote Capture Stations need read access. not the Synchronization directory. The local Remote Capture Station installation reads the workstation name from the operating system on the remote computer. you can use a logical naming structure for the subfolders and provide these names to your RCS operators before they install the RCS locally. If you do not know the workstation names. However. Remote Capture Stations use these job settings when creating batches. YourName-2K. looks for transfer confirmation messages as well as Job Settings. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings-Multiuser Features dialog box. If you know the workstation names that will be assigned automatically. Users at the home site need read and write access. See “Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent” on page 174 for instructions on configuring TeleForm Reader to process DSS files found in these subdirectories. Configuration Steps 3. This directory must NOT require a user name or password for access.  Directory.  Network. one Batch Distribution Reader. you only need to setup the Remote Batch Connect Agent on that particular Reader station.  Multiple Readers. No Setup is required. In this case. De-select any Job in Jobs to include that you do not want to include in the synchronization. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the directory. Select the Enable synchronization option. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 173 • • • . 6. Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches After RCS batches have been submitted to TeleForm. Click OK. A Network connection requires a user name and password. Select the Type of synchronization and define the Synchronization directory:  FTP. You can assign one TeleForm Reader station to evaluate all the batches created by Remote Capture Stations. All Jobs are selected by default. There are several options for targeting RCS batches with Reader:  Single Reader for all RCS batches. You can also “split” the RCS batch load among multiple Reader stations. TeleForm Reader must process them. 5. Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings. 4. you must configure the Remote Batch Connect Agent on each Reader. and you are not using a Batch Distribution Station.” on page 136). It should be disabled on all other Readers. Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent To configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent 1.  Multiple Readers. Start TeleForm Reader. Only one Reader station should have the Batch distribution feature enabled. All Reader stations that process Remote Capture Station batches must use the same base Remote batch directory. each Reader can be configured to process only batches from specific Remote Capture Stations “within” that Remote batch directory. However. Specifies how often Reader station checks its internal queue for new images to distribute. The Remote Batch Connect Agent settings are specific to the Reader station on which the Connect Agent is configured. • • 174 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . See “Create Directories” on page 171 and “Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent” on page 174 for information on the relationship between the Remote batch directory and the RCS-specific subdirectories. Set up the Remote Batch Connect Agent on that station and allow it to distribute RCS batches to other Readers.Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option The best way to “split” the RCS batch load among multiple Reader stations is to designate one Reader as a Batch Distribution station (see “Distribution. 2. From the Utilities menu. If you want multiple Reader stations to process RCS batches. click Connect Agent Setup > Remote Batch Setup. no Batch Distribution Reader. A network connection. unlike the Directory option. 5. requires a user name and password.Configuration Steps 3. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the desired network directory. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 175 • • • . Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings. select the Enable remote batch monitoring checkbox. If necessary. On the Remote Batch Receive tab.  Directory. No Setup is required. use the Browse button to locate it. 6.  FTP. Select the appropriate Type of connection by which this Reader station accesses the Remote batch directory. Open the Remote Workstation tab.  Network. If another user logs in. This directory must not require a user name or password for access. NOTE If using Network Connection Type. the workstation is limited to only these user credentials for network connections to the same server. 4. Define the Remote batch directory you created in “Create Directories” on page 171. the connection fails. 8. If it does not. • • 176 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . type the name of a Remote Capture Station. Click the Add button. NOTE The number of Remote Capture Stations you can add is limited by the license you purchased from Cardiff. In the Add a Remote Workstation dialog box.Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option 7. IMPORTANT This name must exactly match one of the subdirectories you created in the Remote batch directory during “Create Directories” on page 171. you are prompted with an error message. Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations Job Settings can be created and managed through the Job Configuration command in Scan Station.  Any FTP or network passwords that must be entered to gain access to the Remote batch directory or Synchronization directory. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 177 • • • . Designer. If you want other Reader stations to process batches from Remote Capture Stations.  The Workstation Name that they must type during the installation of their Remote Capture Stations. This name is discussed in “Create Directories” on page 171. and Control Center modules. the Synchronize Now command can only be initiated at a Scan Station or Control Center.  The location of the Synchronization directory. open the Remote Batch Connect Agent on those Readers and repeat Step 9. This directory is discussed in “Create Directories” on page 171 and “Synchronization Directory Setup” on page 172. not from within Designer. Only batches from selected Remote Capture Stations are processed by the Reader on which you are configuring the Connect Agent. Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings You must relay the following information to every person who installs a Remote Capture Station:  The location of the Remote batch directory. This directory is discussed in “Create Directories” on page 171. The operators who install the Remote Capture Stations must know this information in order to configure the individual stations.Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations 9. If you want your Remote Capture Station operators to be able to contact Cardiff Technical Support directly. you must provide them with your registration or maintenance contract information. However. Select the checkbox for all Remote Capture Stations that provide batches to this Reader station. 10. NOTE Do not alter the base Remote batch directory on any subsequent Reader stations. • • 178 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option Clicking the Synchronize Now button on the Job Configuration dialog box automatically saves all new and modified Job Settings to the Synchronization directory. Every Remote Capture Station can access the Job Settings found in the Synchronization directory. See “Synchronization Directory Setup” on page 172 above for information on defining this directory. assuming the Remote Capture Stations are also properly configured with the directory location. the Web Capture Option is a very light application. This chapter describes the Web capture option. Web Capture Option CHAPTER 11 The Web Capture Option consists of two components:  The Web Capture Client. From the standpoint of the operator creating a batch. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 179 • • • . which connects the Web Capture Clients and TeleForm. There is no setup program and the Web Capture Option can be run on a wide range of computers. accessed through an Internet browser on remote workstations.  The Web Capture Server. The operator simply browses to a URL. which creates batches of documents and submits them to TeleForm for processing.  Web Capture Stations and TeleForm  Web Capture Concepts  Install the Web Capture Server  Install the Web Capture Client  Manage the Web Capture Option Web Capture Stations and TeleForm The following illustration shows a typical Web Capture and TeleForm system. Chapter 11 Web Capture Option Web Capture Clients Workstations browse to URL at Web Capture Server Web Capture Server Web Capture Clients transfer batches to Web Capture Server Batches Job Settings Web Capture Server supplies clients with Web Capture interface and Job Settings Web Capture directory Synchronization directory Web Capture Server subdirectory o o o TeleForm: Scan Station Designer Control Center Batches Job Settings Firewall TeleForm Reader Web Capture Concepts Understanding these concepts makes it easier to configure and use the Web Capture Option: • • 180 •• • •  Concurrent Users  DSS Files  Data Transfer Methods  Web capture directory TeleForm Administration Guide . DSS Files When a Web Capture Client submits a batch. Data Transfer Methods Web Capture Clients communicate with the Web Capture Server via HTTP or HTTPS. If more Web Capture Clients attempt to access the server than are allowed by the license.Web Capture Concepts  Synchronization directory  Firewall Concurrent Users Each Web Capture Option license limits the number of Web Capture Clients who can access the Web Capture URL simultaneously. it actually transmits a DSS file to the Web Capture Server. the “extra” clients are denied access. This XML file contains any data collected about the batch. The DSS file is a compressed “package” that includes the batch images and an XML file. The Web Capture Server and TeleForm transfer data back-and-forth by one of three methods:  FTP  Directory  Network TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 181 • • • . Such clients receive a message explaining why access was denied. such as index and tracking information. Directory. Network TeleForm See “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191 and “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions on selecting the transfer method.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option http or https Web Capture Clients http or https Web Capture Server FTP. • • 182 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Web Capture Concepts Web capture directory The Web capture directory is the root storage location to which the Web Capture Server saves batches. You are not required to save all Job Settings to this directory. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 183 • • • . The Web Capture Server actually saves batches to a subdirectory in the root Web capture directory. Web Capture Client Batch (DSS) Web Capture Server DSS Web Capture directory DSS Server folder Web Capture Connect Agent TeleForm Reader Synchronization directory The Synchronization directory is the storage location for TeleForm Job Settings used by Web Capture Clients when creating batches. you can limit the available job settings depending on what type of batches are created by Web Capture Clients. Web Capture Client Web Capture Server Synchronization directory Job Settings TeleForm Firewall See “Web Server for Web Capture Option” on page 42 for information on the system requirements for the Web Capture Server. each should have a unique Synchronization directory.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option Both the Remote Capture Option and the Web Capture Option use a Synchronization directory. If you use both these options. you cannot limit the job settings used by Web Capture Clients. If you use the same directory for both. • • 184 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Web Capture Server Web capture directory Synchronization Firewall TeleForm Install the Web Capture Server There are several steps involved in installing and configuring the Web Capture Option to work with TeleForm:  “Install the Web Capture Server” on page 187  “Create Directories” on page 188  “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 185 • • • .Install the Web Capture Server We recommend that the Web Capture Server be insulated from the home TeleForm site by a firewall. The Web Capture Server should be located outside the firewall if Web Capture Clients outside the firewall need access to it. 3. is not naturally compatible with . ASP. Net 2. To use ASP. From the Windows Start menu. Open WCMServices\Web. the directory path may look like C:\Inetpub\TeleForm Web Capture\Backup\10_30_2006_14_00_27. Older Files When installing Web Capture Server 10. named with the date the directory was created. For information on installing the Web Capture Client to remote workstations.Config. 2. see “Install the Web Capture Client” on page 194.Net.Net uses a non-FIPS certified encryption tool which causes a parser error (Win XP) or unhandled exception (Windows Vista) if you attempt to install the Web Capture Server to a system that uses . just add: decryption=”3DES”. NOTE JavaScripts for the TeleForm 9.Net 2.0 / FIPS Requirement ASP. older versions of files that may have been customized in the WCMApp and WCMServices directories are placed in a backup directory. used by the Web Capture Server.Net and .0 and later. In the Run dialog box.IsolateApps" decryptionKey="AutoGenerate.0 and FIPS.config and add the following line under <system.Net 2. • • 186 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .IsolateApps" validation="3DES" decryption="3DES" /> If machineKey already exists in Web.1 release of Web Capture are not supported and must be updated to work with TeleForm 10.3 or later.NET 2.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option  “Choose Reader Stations” on page 190  “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191  “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 These steps cover only the installation of the TeleForm side of the Web Capture Option.0. click Run.0 with Web Capture Server 1. type iisreset and click OK. For instance.web>: <machineKey validationKey="AutoGenerate. The License Agreement screen is shown.Install the Web Capture Server 4.  Click Browse to select a different directory or folder for the installation. 7. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 187 • • • . You should be informed that Internet services were successfully restarted.microsoft. Install the Web Capture Server To install Web Capture Server 1. Insert the TeleForm DVD in the drive of the Web Server. browse the DVD and run the Setup.  If the default folder (Inetpub\WCM) does not exist. Type the Web Capture Server license code (included with the Web Capture Option disc) and click Next. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. 2. 3. The Setup Program should automatically start.exe program. Click Next. Click Next to continue. This screen specifies where the WCM files will be installed. If it does not.com/kb/911722 for more details. The License Code screen is shown. The Welcome screen is shown. TeleForm must already be installed. the Setup program can create it. 6. 4. All Web Capture Option application files are installed to this server. The Choose Destination Location screen is shown. 5. See http://support. The following subdirectories exist under Inetpub\TeleForm Web Capture\. 10. Web Capture Server configuration files  WebHelp. Help files related to the Web Capture Server Administration pages  WCMApp. Create Directories You must create several directories before proceeding. Click Finish. create two more folders:  bat  sync • • 188 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Help files for the Web Capture Clients 13. If you changed the installation location. 11.  AdmHelp. On the Virtual Directory Alias screen. b. but the subdirectory names remain the same. See “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 for instructions on using this page. click Next. The InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is shown when the installation is finished.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option 8. In the WCMDir folder. Open Windows Explorer. Browse to a location that can be accessed both by the Web Capture Server and TeleForm. the root directory may be different. To create the required installation directories 1. To launch this configuration page later. 9. On the Start Copying Files screen. 2. 3. a.aspx c. use your web browser to open this file: http://server_name/WCM/WCMServices/WCMConfig. Web Capture Client files  WCMServices. type an alias for accessing the WCM virtual directory. 12. 4. Proceed to “Create Directories” on page 188. Create a new folder named WCMDir in this location. Select the Open configuration page option to automatically launch a Web page for configuring the Web Capture server. The Setup Status screen tracks the progress of the installation. For example. Proceed to “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189. Open the Configuration Settings tab. type the exact location of the WCMDir\ bat directory you created earlier. 3. The name of this folder should match the machine name of your Web Capture Server. the Web Capture Administration page opens in your web browser. If you selected the Open configuration page option at the end of the Web Capture Option setup program (see Step 11 on page 188). OR To open this page manually. WCMDir sync bat Web Capture Server name Configure The Web Capture Server The Web Capture Server must validate the Web capture directory and Synchronization directory before you can proceed. if your Web Capture Server is named Colossus. In the WCMDir\bat folder.Install the Web Capture Server 5. the full path for this folder should be: WCMDir\bat\Colossus 6. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 189 • • • . go to Start > Programs > TeleForm Web Capture > Web Capture Configuration. 2. In the Web Capture Directory field. create one last folder. 1. a. • • 190 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 8. 7. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for instructions on creating this directory. Proceed to “Choose Reader Stations” on page 190. either because they do not exist or cannot be accessed through the login specifications. 6. type the exact location of the WCMDir\sync directory you created earlier. User ID.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option a. and Password. User ID. you are warned. Choose Reader Stations You must determine how many Reader stations are needed to process Web Capture batches before configuring the Web Capture Option Connect Agent (“Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191). The Web Capture Server attempts to validate the two directories. and Password for the directories. In the Synchronization Directory field. If the Web Capture Directory and Synchronization Directory are on a local drive. Make sure that both directories can be accessed through the same Domain. 5. If either directory is not on a local drive. Click Submit. select the Use default ASP.NET account option.NET account and specify the Domain. de-select Use default ASP. 9. If the directories cannot be validated. 4. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for instructions on creating this directory. you should configure the Web Capture Option Connect Agent on that Reader and no others. From the Utilities menu.” on page 136). Specifies how often Reader station checks its internal queue for new images to distribute. and you are not using a Batch Distribution Station. IMPORTANT Any Reader station on which the Web Capture Option Connect Agent is configured must have read-write access to the WCMDir\bat\Server Name folder.  Single Reader. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for information on creating this folder. The best way to “split” the Web Capture batch load among multiple Reader stations is to designate one Reader as a Batch Distribution station (see “Distribution. Set up the Web Capture Option Connect Agent on that station and allow it to distribute Web Capture batches to other Readers. select the Enable web capture monitoring checkbox. If you want only a single Reader station to process all Web Capture Servers.Install the Web Capture Server You can assign one TeleForm Reader station to evaluate all the batches created by Web Capture Clients. You do not need to configure the Web Capture Option Connect Agent on any other Reader stations. 2. 3. you must configure the Web Capture Connect Agent on each Reader. It should be disabled on all other Readers. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 191 • • • . proceed to “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191. The Web Capture Option Connect Agent settings are specific to the Reader station on which the Connect Agent is configured. Start TeleForm Reader.  Multiple Readers. If you want multiple Reader stations to process Web Capture batches. Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent The Web Capture Option Connect Agent must be configured before TeleForm can process Web Capture batches. On the Web Capture Receive tab. Batch Distribution Reader.  Multiple Readers. To configure the Web Capture Connect Agent 1. You can also “split” the Web Capture Client batch load among multiple Reader stations. click Connect Agent Setup > Web Capture Setup. No Batch Distribution. Only one Reader station should have the Batch distribution feature enabled. After you have determined how TeleForm Readers handle Web Capture batches (see next column). Open the Remote Servers tab. the connection fails. A network connection. No Setup is required. 7. Click the Add button. 10. The Web capture directory specified on the Web Capture Server Administration page MUST match the Web capture directory specified for the Connect Agent. it is: Web Capture Server\WCMDir\bat See “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 for more information on this directory. 6.  Network. By default. 9. Configure Synchronization Directory The Synchronization directory is a central repository for Job Settings created at the home TeleForm site. Place a check next to each Web Server that will send batches to this Reader and click OK. 8. • • 192 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Directory. unlike the Directory option. the workstation is limited to only these user credentials for network connections to the same server. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for instructions on naming this directory. Select the appropriate Type of connection by which this Reader station accesses the Web capture directory. NOTE This name must match the Server Name portion of the WCMDir\bat\ServerName subfolder you created earlier. Define the Web capture directory. If another user logs in. This directory must not require a user name or password for access.  FTP. In the Add a Web Capture Server dialog box. requires a user name and password. Proceed to “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192. type the name of a Web Capture Server and click OK. Web Capture Clients use these Job Settings when creating batches.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option 4. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the desired network directory. Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings. IMPORTANT If using Network Connection Type. 5. Select the Web Settings tab on the Multiuser Features tab. click Configuration.  Directory: This directory must NOT require a user name or password for access. 2. A Network connection requires a user name and password. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module. These settings determine how TeleForm sends Job Settings to the Synchronization directory. 4. Select the Enable synchronization option. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 193 • • • . 3. the subdirectories for Web Capture MUST be different from the directories used for Remote Capture.Install the Web Capture Server IMPORTANT If you are also using Remote Capture Option.  Network: Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the directory. By default. No Setup is required. it is: C:\WCMDir\sync  See “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 for more information on this directory. Specify the Synchronization directory. 5.  FTP: Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings. Select the Type of synchronization. To configure the synchronization directory 1. 6. 7. In the Jobs to include list. Once the Client has been installed. You are then prompted to install the WCM Client. To install the Web Capture Client 1. When you first access Web Capture Server URL. place a check next to the jobs that you want to include in the synchronization. See “Synchronize Job Settings” on page 194 for information on saving Job Settings to the Web Capture Synchronization directory. Install the Web Capture Client The Web Capture Client files are installed to remote workstations the first time a user connect to the Web Capture Option. If you build or modify Job Settings TeleForm Administration Guide . The Job Configuration dialog box is available from: • • 194 •• • •  TeleForm Scan Station > File menu  TeleForm Designer > Utilities menu. Click OK.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option  If necessary. the Web Capture Client is available. 2. However. you still need to perform certain management functions:  Synchronize Job Settings  Limit Web Capture Job Settings  Web Capture Server Administration Synchronize Job Settings Clicking the Synchronize Now button on the Job Configuration dialog box automatically saves Job Settings to the Web Capture Synchronization directory. use the Browse button to locate it. the Synchronize Now command is not available from Designer. you are prompted to install the WCM QC Control. Manage the Web Capture Option After the Web Capture Option has been installed and configured. 3. Manage the Web Capture Option from Designer.  TeleForm Control Center The Synchronize Now button is not available unless you have configured a Synchronization directory for the Web Capture Option or the Remote Capture Option. you must still open the Job Configuration dialog box in Scan Station or Control Center to initiate the Synchronize Now command. you are unable to limit the Job Settings available to Web Capture Clients. not every Job Setting must be made available to this directory. All Job Settings are saved to the single Synchronization directory. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 195 • • • . However. If you use both the Web Capture Option and the Remote Capture Option. and therefore all are available to Web Capture Clients. Limit Web Capture Job Settings Every Web Capture Client is able to access the Job Settings that have been saved to the Web Capture Synchronization directory through the Synchronize Now command. you should have two separate Synchronization directories. If you use the same Synchronization directory for both options. Both the Web Settings configuration dialog box and the Job Properties > General tab for a specific Job allow you to determine if a Job Setting should be added to the Web Capture Synchronization directory. 2. click File > Job Configuration. click Configuration. Job Properties Dialog Box To include a job in the Web Capture Service 1. 3. Use the Jobs to include controls to determine which Job Settings are made available to Web Capture Clients. open the Multiuser Features > Web Settings tab. 3. Open the Job Configuration dialog box.  In Control Center. • • 196 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Click Apply and OK. Select the job that you want to edit in the Jobs window. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module. click Utilities > Job Configuration.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option Web Settings Tab To select the Job Settings available to Web Capture Clients 1.  In Designer.  In Scan Station. select Global Settings > Job Configuration. 2. 4. Click the Modify button. go to Start > Programs > Cardiff TeleForm Web Capture > Web Capture Configuration. On the General tab. Web Capture Server Administration To open the Web Capture Server Administration page manually. See the following sections for information on the Web Capture Administration controls:  “Configuration Settings Page” on page 198  “License Info Page” on page 199  “Session Info Page” on page 200 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 197 • • • . The Job Properties dialog box opens.Manage the Web Capture Option 4. 5. use the Include in Web Capture checkbox to determine if the Job Setting is available to Web Capture Clients. See “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191 for instructions. and either directory is not on a local drive. it is: Web Capture Server\WCMDir\bat The Web Capture Server saves batches to a subdirectory in the Web Capture Directory. it is: • • 198 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . make sure that both directories can be accessed through the same Domain. By default. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for information about creating this subdirectory. The Web Capture Server validates the directories by attempting to access them. and Password. IMPORTANT At least one TeleForm Reader station must be configured to process batches from this directory. Synchronization Directory This directory stores the TeleForm Job Settings that are used by Web Capture Clients when creating batches. If it cannot. If you change the default directories. you are warned to change either the directories or the login credentials. User ID.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option Configuration Settings Page This page allows you to specify the location of two key directories. By default. After configuring these directories. Web Capture Directory This is the root directory to which Web Capture Servers store batches. click Submit. 2. Make sure that both directories can be accessed through the same Domain. License Info Page This page allows you to type a Web Capture Option license and displays a summary of the active license. To add a Web Capture Option license 1. If either directory is not on a local drive.NET account option. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 199 • • • . Network Login If the Remote Batch and Remote Synchronization directories are on a local drive. select the Use default ASP. You must add a Web Capture Option license before using the Web Capture Option to capture batches. de-select Use default ASP.Manage the Web Capture Option Web Capture Server\WCMDir\sync This directory cannot be created from the Configuration Settings page. TeleForm must be configured to save Job Settings to this directory. Click the Replace License button. User ID.NET account and specify the Domain. and Password. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for information about creating this subdirectory. User ID. See “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions. and Password for the directories. Type or replace a Web Capture Option license code in the License Code field. IP Address of the client. The Sessions table provides detailed information on every Web Capture Client that is currently accessing the Web Capture Server or has accessed the Web Capture Server in the past.  IP Address. Session Info Page This page shows the current Web Capture Clients that are currently connected (sessions) to the Web Capture Server. License Summary The License Summary window displays:  Name of the license  Serial number of the license  Expiration date of the license  How many users can access the Web Capture Server concurrently. • • 200 •• • •  Sessions. To reset a license Use the Reset button to clear a license entry and reload the last valid Web Capture Option license. The Active column indicates if the client is currently accessing the server or not.  Client System. The license is added to the Web Capture Server. A summary of the license is displayed in the License Summary window. See “Session Info Page” on page 200 for information on tracking current sessions. TeleForm Administration Guide . Machine ID of the computer on which the client runs.Chapter 11 Web Capture Option 3. You must manually refresh the page to see the latest information. This page does not automatically refresh when a session begins or is terminated.  Login Time. The last time the client submitted a batch to the server.Manage the Web Capture Option  User.  Last Batch.  Last Contact. The last time the client had contact with the server.  False: Not currently connected to the server. Whether the session is connected to the server. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 201 • • • . The last time the client logged into the server.  Active. User name of the client.  True: Currently connected to the server. Chapter 11 Web Capture Option • • 202 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Keyboard Options. and Character Mode Options. instead of skipping these modes completely. Configure the keystrokes that control certain functions in Verifier.  Access Configuration Controls  Correction Options  Keyboard Options  Form Mode Options  Field Mode Options  Character Mode Options TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 203 • • • . and Form Mode).  Form. you may want to change these aspects of how Verifier functions:  Correction Options. and Character Mode correction. you can set up thresholds to launch them under certain conditions. Configure how Verifier behaves and looks during Form Mode. However. Customize Verifier for Your Operators CHAPTER 12 The default Verifier configuration works well for processing the majority of forms. Capture Mode. Field Mode. Field. This chapter describes how to customize Verifier and includes the following topics. If you need to visit every available correction (Character Mode. Field Mode. Start Control Center. • • 204 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Click the User Settings sub-branch to display the TeleForm operators. Double-click the Configuration Settings branch to expand it. 2. 3.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators Access Configuration Controls To access the Verifier configuration of an operator 1. 5. A menu of Verifier settings opens in the display pane. Double-click any setting to access the corresponding dialog box. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 205 • • • . Double-click an operator from the list.Access Configuration Controls 4. but it is blank. The field is shown during Field and Form Mode correction.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators Correction Options Depending on the nature of the forms you are processing. see page 206. Field Character Threshold Options If the data for a given data entry field meets the conditions specified in the Field character threshold settings. the field is excluded from Character Mode correction. there are occasions where you may wish to skip over one or more correction modes. it must meet the following requirements:  The number of errors in the field is greater than the Maximum in field value. or restrict a particular workstation to a single correction mode. AND  The number of errors in the field is greater than or equal to the Minimum in field value. you may also set the Image Management Options such that only forms requiring that type of correction are visible at this workstation. For instructions on setting your Image Management Options. In order for a field to be excluded from Character and Field Mode correction. AND • • 206 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . If you designate a workstation for a particular correction mode. Percentage in Field The percentage of characters in the field that could contain questionable characters and not be excluded.Keyboard Options  the percentage of errors is greater than the Percentage in field value. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 207 • • • . Keyboard Options The Keyboard Options determine what key strokes are assigned to commands for these correction modes:  Character Mode  Field Mode  Form Mode . Maximum in Field The maximum number of questionable characters a field could contain and not be excluded. Click Correction Keyboard Settings. single line Image Zones.Multi Line Fields (multi-line Image Zones)  Form Mode .Single Line Fields (Constrained Print Fields. Minimum in Field The minimum number of questionable characters a field must have to qualify for exclusion.Choice Fields To assign a New Keystroke to a Command 1. and Entry Fields)  Form Mode . In the Command list. select the command. 4. Click Add or double-click the command. 6. Shift. A key combination can only be assigned to one command per category. In the Select a Key list. 3. 7. If the current key combination is already mapped to a command. click the key you want to assign to the command. Select a correction mode from the Category list. • • 208 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators 2. and Alt check boxes are available or disabled depending on whether they may be used with the key you selected in step 6. If a key that is already assigned to another command is chosen as the new key assignment. it replaces the old key assignment. 8. the name of the assigned command is displayed in the Currently assigned to box. The Control. 5. The New Key Assignment dialog box opens. 2. To restore defaults for a single command. To restore defaults for all the commands in a category. Repeat these steps for the same command or a new one. Click Form Correction. Select either the Correction Options tab. or the Image Positioning tab. 2. Form Mode Options To modify the behavior and appearance of Verifier during Form Mode correction 1. select the category in the Category list and click Reset All. The Form Mode Options dialog opens. the Appearance tab. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 209 • • • . Click Options-Keyboard to open the Keyboard Assignments dialog. but a specific key combination can only control one command. You can assign more than one key combination to a command.Form Mode Options 9. In the Keyboard Assignments dialog box. 3. To restore Default Keystroke Assignments 1. select the command that you want to remove the keyboard assignment for in the Command list. Click Remove. To remove a Keystroke Assignment 1. Select the key assignment in the Current Keys list. select it in the Command list and click Reset. 3. 2. This option is disabled by default. a Verifier operator cannot override any field constraints or validation settings.  Automatically move to the next character needing review.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators Correction Options Tab These settings primarily affect how Verifier behaves in Form Mode correction. When enabled. When enabled. the Verifier cursor automatically advances after you replace a questionable character. This option is enabled by default.  Don't allow incorrect entry. Verifier automatically exist the Capture Zone after all fields have been visited. When enabled. When enabled. You can choose any or all of the following settings from the Correction Options tab of the Form Mode Options dialog box. This option is enabled by default. When enabled. this option automatically saves the item after the last field is corrected. This option is disabled by default. When enabled. TeleForm Administration Guide . a Verifier operator entering characters in an Image Zone or Constrained Print Field will only be able to enter those special characters that have been enabled for that field. This option is disabled by default.  Skip empty Image Zones. • • 210 •• • •  Don't prompt to save data after each form.  Only allow special characters from recognition settings.  Leave after all fields visited. Verifier ignores Image Zones that do not contain any information. This option is enabled by default. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 211 • • • . When enabled. When enabled. Verifier automatically exits the Capture Zone after you TAB out of the last field. Appearance Tab These settings determine how the various elements of an image are displayed during Form Mode correction. Verifier prompts you to confirm before leaving the Capture Zone. Select a color for the following elements of an image during Form Mode correction:  Normal Text  Current Field Highlight  Selected Character Highlight  Questionable Character Text  Choice/Entry Field Mark  Multi-Line Image Zone Font Size. This option is enabled by default.  Color.  Leave when user presses enter. Verifier automatically exits the Capture Zone when the Verifier operator presses the ENTER key. These settings determine the size of the text that is shown when you type a value for a multi-line Image Zone.  Always prompt before leaving. When enabled.Form Mode Options  Leave after tabbing out of last field. This option is disabled by default. When you tab into a Constrained Print Field. For Example: You select Center Field in Bottom of Window for Constrained Print Fields. Choose from: • • 212 •• • •  Fit Sides  Fit Vertical  Actual Size (100%) TeleForm Administration Guide . Default Image Scaling Select the default scale for the image when displayed in Form Mode. the form image moves so that the Constrained Print Field is displayed at the bottom center of the Verifier Image Window. Image Positioning Tab Image Positioning These settings determine how the image of a specific type of data entry field is displayed when that particular type of data entry field is visited during Form Mode.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators The Medium setting is the default value. You begin to correct a form in Form Mode.  Don’t allow incorrect entry. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 213 • • • . 3. When enabled. This option is enabled by default. General Options Tab These settings determine how Verifier behaves during Field Mode correction. When selected. The Field Mode Options dialog opens. For instance. Click Field Correction. 2. a Verifier operator entering characters in an Image Zone or Constrained Print Field will only be able to enter those special characters that have been enabled for that field. Select the General Options or Appearance tab. you cannot override any constraints or validation settings which were assigned to the field either during template design or by a script.Field Mode Options  Magnify (200%) Field Mode Options To change Field Mode options 1.  Only allow special characters from recognition settings. you could not insert a numeric character if the field was designated as alphabetic. If you type a character to replace the questionable (red) character.  Color. This option is disabled by default. In such cases. However. you can disable the Exclude Image Zones function. single-line Image Zones are only corrected during Form Mode.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators  Automatically skip to the next questionable character. the cursor advances to the next questionable character on the item. This option is set to 5 by default. Select a color for the following elements of an image during Field Mode correction:  Corrected Text  Current Text  Current Questionable Character Text  Selected Character Highlight  Uncorrected Text  Uncorrected Questionable Character Text  Current Field Highlight • • 214 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . By default.  Number of fields to display. Controls how many fields displayed on the screen in Field Mode correction.  Exclude Image Zones. you may encounter situations where Character or Field Mode correction for such fields is appropriate. Appearance Tab These settings determine how the various elements of an image are displayed during Field Mode correction. The maximum number of uncorrected characters that are shown on the screen at once.  Exclude confusable characters.  Number of corrected characters to display. General Options Tab These settings determine how Verifier behaves during Character Mode correction. The Character Mode Options dialog opens. 9 x 6. Click Character Correction. Sets the number of rows and columns of characters that appear. This option filters out characters that are hard to identify without seeing them in context (like the letter O and the TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 215 • • • . The default setting is 9 x 6. This means that the character boxes are sized to fit in nine columns and six rows in the Verifier window.  Number of uncorrected characters to display. 3. and 2 x 1 (largest). The default value is 10. up to the number of characters to display selected. Select General Options or Appearance. The default is 10.Character Mode Options Character Mode Options To change Character Mode options 1. 6 x 4. 3 x 2. Available grid sizes are 12 x 8 (smallest). The maximum number of corrected characters that are shown on the screen at once.  Number of columns and rows to display. 2.  Alphabetical by best guess. Click the Setup button to configure which characters are deemed “confusable. Sorts characters by confidence. grouping questionable Numeric.” TeleForm provides a default setting for look-alike characters that can be enabled simply by checking the Exclude Confusable Characters check box. Causes a character to automatically forego Character Mode correction based on how confidently it was evaluated by TeleForm Reader. single-line Image Zones are only corrected during Form Mode. Sorts characters by the name of the field from which they came.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators number 0). In such cases. Sorts characters according to the recognized best guess character.  Alphabetical by field name. See “Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode” on page 217 for instructions on customizing this function. This groups all characters that were recognized as 'A' together and all characters that were recognized as 'B' together.  Sorting. This choice is the default sort setting. you can disable the Exclude Image Zones function. The default is 30. Higher confidence characters are displayed first.  Confidence. Alpha.  Exclude if confidence is less than. you may encounter situations where Character or Field Mode correction for such fields is appropriate. By default. and AlphaNumeric characters together. This option has been found to result in the fastest rate of verification during Character Mode. Excluded characters are corrected during Field Mode. You can sequentially sort the characters that are shown during Character Mode. Values can range from 0-100. followed by lower confidence characters. However. where they can be more easily identified from the context of the field. It sorts characters based on the allowed range of values for the character. etc.  Field type.  Exclude Image Zones. • • 216 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Specify where the best guess characters should be displayed. Displays best guess characters for all characters in character mode. upper right. and Current Character Highlight Rectangle. and lower right. Possible choices are Small. The preview is updated when this is changed. lower left. Current Background. it is virtually impossible to distinguish them during Character Mode correction. but are instead shown for the first time in Field Mode correction. Current Text.  Best guess character font size.Character Mode Options Appearance Tab These settings determine how the various elements of an image are shown during Character Mode. Control how large the best guess character is.  Best guess character position. If this box is cleared best guess characters are only displayed for corrected characters. By TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 217 • • • . Select a color to display for Corrected Text. Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode The Look-Alike Character feature allows you to establish a list of characters that are never shown in Character Mode correction. Uncorrected Text. Due to their similarity. The purpose of the character feature is to reduce the number of characters that get held over during Character Mode correction.  Show best guess for uncorrected characters. Possible choices are upper left. The preview is updated whenever this option is changed.  Colors. One example of look alike characters is the letter l (el) and the number 1 (one). Medium. and Large. where they can be deduced from the context of the field. 2. Click the Setup button. they are excluded from Character Mode correction and are shown instead during Field Mode correction. From the Options menu. 3. click Character Mode. On the Character Mode Options dialog box. To add or remove characters from the default Look-Alike settings 1. The Look-Alike Character Setup for Character Mode dialog box opens. • • 218 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . click the General Options tab. 6. 5. 4.Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators designating these as look alike characters. Make sure the Exclude confusable characters check box is selected. Start Verifier. 8. b. Each Character type has a unique set of extended characters. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 219 • • • . select the character you wish to include. Select the Character class. and so on. parentheses. Select the Character class.Character Mode Options 7. non-English characters. c. brackets. superscript numbers (1. To exclude a character: a. select the character you wish to exclude. In the Correctable Characters list. In the Correctable Characters list. Add Extended Characters Extended characters are items such as his common punctuation marks. c. You can then move them to the Characters to include list as needed. 2. you would need to select each Character type in turn. Click the button. b. To include a character: a. If you select the Include external characters check box. Click the button. and 3). To add all the possible extended characters to the Characters to include list. the full list of extended characters are “appended” to characters in the Characters to exclude list. Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators Restore Default Character Exclusion Settings To restore the default character exclusion settings 1. click Set Defaults. 2. The Set Look-Alike Character Defaults dialog box opens. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Look-Alike Character Setup for Character Mode dialog box. 4. On the Look-Alike Character Setup for Character Mode dialog box. Select the Character classes you want to restore to their default values. • • 220 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 3. Speed up your system by analyzing your system.  “Run and Manage TeleForm” on page 223.  “Maintain System Performance” on page 251.PART 3 TeleForm Maintenance This section provides information about general maintenance of your TeleForm system.  “Analyze Form Design” on page 277.  “Revision Control” on page 259. Describes TeleForm Control Center and Monitor. two applications that help you run the system. Describes how TeleForm can work with the SourceSafe revision control application.  “Analyze Your System Throughput” on page 295. Speed up your system by analyzing your form design. Simple maintenance procedures can keep TeleForm running smoothly. . Part 3 TeleForm Maintenance • • 222 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . This service ‘locks’ TeleForm to the server using Machine Locking. TeleForm License Service The License Service is automatically installed to the TeleForm Server 10. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 223 • • • . Run and Manage TeleForm CHAPTER 13 This chapter describes how to run and manage TeleForm  License Monitoring  Run Modules  Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services  Control Center  TeleForm Monitor License Monitoring TeleForm modules cannot be run from a workstation unless TeleForm can verify that you have a valid. This is done using TeleForm License Service that is used to lock TeleForm to the TeleForm server using Machine Locking.0 and later and used to manage licenses. activated product. See “TeleForm License Service” on page 223 for details about these license monitoring methods. click Windows Start > Programs > Cardiff TeleForm and select the module. 2. all the TeleForm modules are available on every TeleForm workstation. Run Modules Most often. but you do not need to do this.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm To start the TeleForm License Service 1. find the TeleForm License Service. NOTE AutoMerge Publisher and Reader can be run as services only by TeleForm Enterprise. If you choose the default installation method. Initially. Reader and AMP stations running those modules as services (“Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services” on page 224) are also tracked. they must be manually started. Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services The TeleForm workstation install program automatically configures two services on each workstation:  AutoMerge Publisher (AMP)  Reader These services are installed and registered by the setup program. all the program files for all the TeleForm modules are installed to each workstation. Confirm the Startup Type is Automatic. Open Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services on your TeleForm Server. you can change the startup method from manual to automatic. You can choose to install only certain modules to workstations. TeleForm License Service keeps track of how many instances of each module are running and prevents you from launching modules for which you have insufficient licenses. On the Services window. To launch a module To start a TeleForm module on a workstation. TeleForm Workgroup does not support this configuration. 3. However. See “Configure Services” on page 225 for instructions. • • 224 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Reader and AMP can also be run as regular applications. if you want to use Reader’s Connect Agent Setup feature. or on any member of a cluster if that cluster is acting as the TeleForm Server. For example. on these server operating systems. if you need to create a new merge. Configure Services To configure the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader services 1. you can always launch the regular user interface. 3. configure the merge. not only services. Simply click Windows Start > Programs > Cardiff TeleForm > TeleForm Reader or AutoMerge Publisher. you can launch AMP. Global Configuration of Services The Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box. Similarly. Reader and AMP have no user interface Even if you usually run these modules as services. then shutdown the module and run the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher service. allows you to configure certain aspects of Reader and AutoMerge Publisher. You can also configure merges through Designer’s Utility menu. Reader and AMP services can run on these server operating systems:  Windows Server 2003 (SP2)  2008 Server (Service Pack 2). TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 225 • • • . From the Control Panel. you can launch the Reader module and use the Utility > Connect Agent menu. described on “Change the System Configuration” on page 117. click Administrative Tools. Windows 2008 R2 Server (Service Pack 1) IMPORTANT They CANNOT be run as a service on the TeleForm Server.Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services System Requirements In addition to the operating systems supported for workstations. Start the TeleForm workstation on which the service(s) are run. Launch the Windows Control Panel. 2. These configuration settings apply whether the modules are run as regular modules or as services. User Interface When run as services. if applicable) and password. 8. • • 226 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm 4. You must specify a valid user name (including domain. choose the Automatic Startup type. On the General tab. 7. 5. Open the Log on tab and choose the log-on method for the service:  Local System account  This account. The service’s Properties dialog box opens. click Services. Right-click the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader service and select Properties. From the Administrative Tools window. 6. but does not run on its own. The relationship of the Control Center snap-in to the MMC consists of a shared common hosting environment. Therefore. The MMC environment provides for seamless integration between snap-ins. The Control Center snap-in delivers the actual management behavior. and find ways to optimize your system. If your experiment (form processing with the current TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 227 • • • .Control Center 9. and how quickly these images are being processed. Because of the sophisticated equipment (MMC). and cross-application integration. analyzing form processing becomes a scientific pursuit. TeleForm Control Center manages every aspect of automated capture processing in TeleForm. Control Center Control Center is a powerful application that allows you to monitor and control your TeleForm system. When you are processing a high volume of data. Click OK on the Properties dialog box. MMC itself does not provide any management functionality. you can find where the system is not as efficient as it could be. The Control Center snap-in resides in the MMC. TeleForm Control Center is a snap-in for Microsoft Management Console (MMC). You can think of TeleForm Control Center as a high-tech diagnostics lab. the combination of Control Center and MMC allows you to manage your TeleForm system within an integrated interface. it is important to know how many images are in each phase of the system. With TeleForm Control Center.  Configuration Settings branch. Allows you to generate reports based on the statistics in Control Center. and more detailed statistics on each of the TeleForm modules and users. NOTE A user must have Full Rights to the TeleForm directory in order to use Control Center. Allows you to customize the global. Displays summary statistics and licenses of the TeleForm system. This tree operates like the Windows Explorer tree.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm configuration) does not yield the desired results.  Current Workload branch. click that branch. and come up with a solution (by changing one or more configuration settings and/or by changing one or more form designs). Displays special conditions that signal some sort of inefficiency in your TeleForm system. The following bullets highlight the major benefit of each branch in the Control Center tree. To display a branch’s contents in the right pane of the Control Center window.  Alerts branch. Control Center Branches Control Center is composed of 5 distinct branches. you troubleshoot the problem (using Control Center Statistics). and local settings of your TeleForm system. Outline of the Control Center Tree Control Center functions are accessed by clicking folders on the Control Center tree. • • 228 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Reports branch. Displays detailed statistics of every batch and form that is currently being processed in the TeleForm system.  System branch. user. right-click Readers. You can also access this menu by right-clicking a folder or sub-folder. sub-folders are displayed underneath the main folder. This feature allows you to view multiple windows of information on the same screen.  When you double-click on a folder that expands. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 229 • • • . or double-click the folder (minus).  To expand a folder. click  To collapse an expanded folder. The Readers sub-folder opens in its own window. For example. or double-click the folder.Control Center The Control Center tree is in the left pane of the Control Center window:  Each folder in the tree represents a category of information. and then select New window from here on the shortcut menu.  When you click on a folder. This menu applies to the folder or sub-folder that you select on the Control Center tree. its contents are displayed in the right pane of the Control Center window (the display pane). Customize Your Control Center window The Action menu contains options that allow you to customize the display of the Control Center window. if you want to put the contents of the Readers sub-folder in its own window. click (plus). The Control Center Properties dialog box opens. • • 230 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Graph Colors The Colors tab allows you to set the colors used in the Control Center Graphs. The Colors dialog box opens. 3. 5. 2. Double-click Control Center in the display pane. To change the graph colors 1. Double-click Control Center. 4. double-click Configuration Settings. Click the Colors tab. In the TeleForm Control Center tree. This folder expands to include four sub-folders. The Control Center list is shown in the display pane. Reader. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 231 • • • . Scan Station. Using Control Center Statistics. They also cover more general things such as the average time it takes to evaluate one image in TeleForm Reader. low and average time to evaluate a form’s image in TeleForm Reader.Control Center 6.  High. and AutoMerge Publisher stations are being used.  Number of images evaluated in TeleForm Reader and the number of images corrected in TeleForm Verifier. Control Center statistics cover specific things such as the number of images in a batch that are waiting to be evaluated by Reader stations. Change the Graph Colors as desired.  Estimated time to complete evaluation and correction of all images in your TeleForm system. you can determine the following:  How many TeleForm Designer. Click OK. Using these statistics. This analysis includes extensive system and operator statistics.  How many images are waiting for evaluation in TeleForm Reader and correction in TeleForm Verifier. Workflow Analysis Control Center gives you access to complete workflow analysis.  Average time to correct a form’s image in TeleForm Verifier. Verifier. you can manage and optimize the entire data collection process: from scanning images and correcting forms through final data output. 7. It is recommended that you enable this setting. 2. • • 232 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Statistics Parameters Before you start analyzing TeleForm processing. Double-click Control Center in the display pane. these intermediate records remain on your system until you delete them manually. and may require a large amount of disk space. you may want to set Form Tracking to Minimal Tracking to maximize the system’s speed. 4. With Full Tracking on...Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Recommended Statistic Settings You can use the default Statistics Collection settings. slow down the system considerably. receives. In the TeleForm Control Center tree. make sure that you only do so while you are optimizing a single form or document. expand the Configuration Settings branch. To set the statistics parameters 1. with the following exceptions:  If you want to collect Reader statistics. Collecting these statistics can greatly slow down form evaluation in your Reader stations. check box when you are done optimizing that form or document.  If you are processing a large number of items per day. In addition. Select Control Center. you must select the Collect Reader statistics check box. 3. If you need to collect detailed field statistics. you must specify what time period you want to focus on and how often you want to measure TeleForm. IMPORTANT Minimal Tracking automatically deletes intermediate records (such as prints. Full Tracking collects and stores intermediate records. make sure that you clear the Collect detailed field statistics. The Control Center Properties dialog box opens with the Data tab displayed. and sends). include data for only one day. For example. 6. NOTE If you have built up a large amount of information in your statistics databases. Click OK to save settings and close the Control Center Properties dialog box. Your Purge Log settings impact how much data is actually available. 7. For example. do one of the following:  Click the Include all data option if you want to include all statistical information from the databases. type a number. Control Center updates the statistics every 5 minutes.Control Center 5. and increase the value in the Refresh Data (sec) box. type the number of minutes that you want deleted and completed batches to show up under the Current Workload branch. the statistics are only for today. Type the number of days that you want the statistics to reflect. if you type 1. Refer to “Use the Purge Log” on page 252 for more information. To improve system performance and responsiveness. Under Statistics Data. 8. if you type 300. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 233 • • • . Under Batch Data. you may notice a slight decrease in system performance. In the Refresh Data (sec) box.  Click the Include data for (days) option if you want to include statistics for a specific time interval. 9. Click the General sub-tab.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm NOTE Clicking OK starts a refresh process of stored data using the new settings. expand Configuration Settings and click the Global Settings sub-folder. The Global TeleForm Settings > Reader dialog box opens. 4. Select the template that you want to collect field • • 234 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 3. You can also click the Collect Reader field statistics check box if you want to collect evaluation statistics for every field on a particular form or document. you see the hourglass pointer). In the Control Center tree. and how much of this data you are going to display. Depending on how much information is stored in your statistics databases. Click the Collect Reader statistics check box if you want to collect statistics from TeleForm Reader. Your statistic parameters are now specified. 2. Reader Statistic Collection To change which statistics are collected from TeleForm Reader 1. it might take some time to save these settings (in which case. Double-click Reader Settings. expand Configuration Settings and click the Global Settings sub-folder. Click the Collect Verifier statistics check box. 3. The Global TeleForm Settings > Global System dialog box opens. In the Control Center tree. not while processing. or select <All forms> if you want to collect field statistics for all of your forms and documents. 5. 4. Verifier Statistic Collection To collect Verifier statistics 1.Control Center statistics for. 6. Click OK. NOTE Remember that you only want to collect Reader field statistics while optimizing a form or document. Click the General sub-tab. 2. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 235 • • • . click the Minimal Tracking check box. 5. Double-click Global System. Click OK. To collect only the most fundamental statistics. you can specify conditions that result in a warning message being displayed.g. 4. a file exceeding 200KB in size. Double-click Control Center in the display pane. you can have messages open whenever an administrator-specified event occurs..  When there are items that have been in the system for more than a specified number of days. In the TeleForm Control Center tree. 3. and type 300 in the corresponding box.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Alerts With Control Center Alerts. a file exceeding 100KB in size. when a specific event occurs.  When a Reader station has stalled.  When a TeleForm database log file exceeds the size specified. you can set up Control Center to perform certain actions. e. Optionally. expand the Configuration Settings branch.  When more than a specified number of batches need to be committed.  When more than a specified number of images need to be evaluated.. Select Control Center.g. if you want to be notified when more than 300 images need evaluation. Alerts in Control Center To aid your management of the TeleForm process. Click the Alerts tab. such as sending an email or executing a command. For example. You can generate alerts for the following conditions:  When TeleForm estimates that the forms or documents in the system are not be completed by a certain time. 2. • • 236 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The Control Center Properties dialog box opens. you can enable the “More than __ images need evaluation” Alert.  When more than a specified number of images need to be corrected. Using Control Center Alerts. To specify the conditions of Control Center alert messages 1. You can then take the necessary actions to increase (or start) the evaluation of images whenever there is a backlog. e.  When a TeleForm Statistic file exceeds the size specified. you should specify under what conditions you want Control Center to display Alert messages. IMPORTANT Alert notifications only work while Control Center is running. The Alert Properties dialog box opens. Click on the Alert Action button to the left of the event. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 237 • • • .Control Center Email Alerts In addition to displaying alerts in the Control Center module. Change the relevant alert properties. 2. or log the event in the NT Event Log. you can also set Control Center Alerts to provide email notification. To set Alert Properties for a given event 1. execute a command. use “%1” to indicate the placement of the message text.  Test Action. you can send an email alert to a test address).g.  Log Alert to NT Event Log. Some alerts use additional filtering options:  Same alert subject suppresses subsequent alerts from the same batch. you can test them by clicking the Test Action button. Specifies a command to be performed when the given condition occurs. Click the Send Email to checkbox and type one or more email addresses in the input field separated by semicolons. Click the Log Alert to NT Event Log checkbox to log the event. After setting up the Alert Actions.g.  Send Email to. Type the time (in hours) in the input field. If you want the alert message text to be added to the command line.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm The Alert section displays the Alert ID and a description of the alert (e. Sends a log entry to the Event Log on the TeleForm Server. • • 238 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . file. The Re-Notification section allows you to specify when to send another alert. Defines the recipient(s) of the Email Alert. workstation. Whatever actions were selected is performed (e.  Execute command line. “Estimated completion later than __ today”). etc.  Suppress subsequent occurrences for __ hours prevents further alerts for a specified time period. etc. To set up e-mail delivery 1. Click Apply to save and apply your settings. Type your Outbound mail server.  Select Re-notify if not cleared in __ hours to force an alert notification in the specified time frame. Events that have email alert actions associated with them have a yellow arrow on the Alert Action button . 3. file. if you have several stalled Readers. or High). The default value is SMTP. Setting Any alert subject suppresses the alert notifications from all the stalled Reader workstations. Normal. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 239 • • • . workstation. 4. if available). For example. if the alert has not been cleared in that time.Control Center  Any alert subject suppresses subsequent alerts from any batch. Select Send Method from the drop-down menu (SMTP or MAPI. The default value is Normal. 3. E-Mail Alert Setup You can define separate alert properties for each event in the Workflow list. Type the time (in hours) in the input field. Click the Email Setup button. 2. Select Message Importance from the drop-down menu (Low. Port and Sender/Reply address. setting the Same alert subject option only suppresses the alert notifications from the original workstation. The Outbound E-Mail dialog box opens. Only affect a specific operator. you can configure all global. Use the Configuration Settings folder to access: • • 240 •• • •  Global Settings. workstation settings and user settings. 6.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm 5. click the OK button to return to Control Center Properties dialog box. Configure TeleForm with Control Center Control Center can be used to configure all of your TeleForm settings. and local (station) settings in one place. Once you have finished setting your Alert Properties. Affect all TeleForm workstations and users.  User Settings. TeleForm Administration Guide . Click OK to save your alerts. 7. With Control Center. every TeleForm workstation and user runs off the network. Instead of going to each TeleForm workstation to configure TeleForm. you have control over every configuration in TeleForm. Only affect a specific workstation. Control Center also allows you to manage and configure the TeleForm systems global settings. regardless of whether or not a particular workstation or user is logged on.  Station Settings. Click OK to save your Email Send options. Having centralized control simplifies the set up of TeleForm. user. In a multiuser environment. form identification. Configuration command on the Utilities menu of any major TeleForm application. disk space monitoring and other general Reader settings.. user and form in the TeleForm system. Image Preprocessing command on the Utilities menu of any major TeleForm application Recognition Set Enables the recognition (processing) of Existing forms and VersiForms. Configuration command on the Utilities menu of any major TeleForm application Job Configuration Allows you to save the settings for a batch and use these settings for future batches of the same type. image handling. Reader and AutoMerge Publisher window Purge Log Set up the removal (purge) of information from the TeleForm system. Form Merge command on the Utilities menu of the TeleForm Designer. OCR performance. be careful when you change a global setting. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 241 • • • . Configuration command on the Utilities menu of any major TeleForm application Form Merges Enables/disables and sets up form merges between form or document fields and database values. Security Sets up a security system that restricts access of certain information and TeleForm functions to designated users. Security command on the Utilities menu of the TeleForm Verifier window Licenses Displays the current license information of your TeleForm system. Setting Description Also Found In. Purge Log command on the Utilities menu of the TeleForm Designer or Reader window Multiuser Features Sets up features that are unique to multiuser versions of TeleForm. Therefore. Job Configuration command on the File menu of the TeleForm Scan Station window Advanced Configuration Allows you to change the value of additional global settings are not shown in the Global Setting options listed above.Control Center Global Settings Global settings are those settings that apply to every workstation. License Info command on the File menu of the TeleForm License Manager window Image Preprocessing Sets up the preprocessing settings of all form images that enter TeleForm Reader. These settings are the most powerful settings in Control Center.. recognition. Recognition Set command on the File menu of the TeleForm Designer window Reader Settings Sets up Reader task settings. because it can affect your TeleForm system dramatically. specifies whether to export forms with missing pages. and enables/disables audible alerts for this workstation. The following table contains a description of each Local TeleForm Setting: • • 242 •• • • Station Setting Description Local System tab Sets up batch automation. Designer tab Specifies whether or not a new form is created when TeleForm Designer is started. TeleForm Administration Guide . When you double-click on a workstation. a list of your TeleForm workstations are shown in the display pane. and specifies the TeleForm Spell Checker options for this workstation. you probably have the enable evaluations option for this Reader turned off. you can turn on the enable evaluations and leave it on until the queue is sufficiently reduced.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Station Settings When you click the Station Settings sub-folder. For example. specifies the background color of Existing forms. if you have TeleForm Reader generating batches using Automated Batch Creation on a workstation that is also used for verification. if you determine that the amount of images in the evaluation queue is such that you cannot complete their evaluation by the end of the workday. the Local TeleForm Settings dialog box for that workstation opens. However. 3. Click the User Settings sub-folder. If you use AutoMerge Publisher. The user settings is shown in the display pane. 4. The list of operators is shown. To view a user’s settings 1. For more information on changing user settings. Merge/Print tab Defines how forms and images are printed. refer to “Customize Verifier for Your Operators” on page 203. this tab also controls certain aspects of the merge function. 2. Expand the Configuration Settings branch. Configuration Options tab Changes the value of miscellaneous settings for this workstation. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 243 • • • . Select a user from the list.Control Center Station Setting Description Reader tab Sets up the configuration of TeleForm Reader for this workstation. Expand the User Settings branch. User Settings User settings apply to individual TeleForm operators. Select a batch disposition task from the Action list. Select Properties.  If you want to change station configuration dialogs that do not require administrative rights. and then select Login. or you can click Cancel on the TeleForm Login dialog box. you must log on as a user with administrative rights. To log on as a different user while TeleForm Control Center is open 1. 2. you can log on as any TeleForm user. Log on to Control Center If you have security enabled (using the Security option of the Global Settings sub-folder in TeleForm Control Center).  If you want to change Global or Local configurations. you are asked to type a login and password. you need to have the right to “Configure Reader” set. Click OK. The TeleForm Login dialog box opens. or view sensitive information.  Commit  Discard  Pause  Resume 5.  If you want to change Purge Log settings you must log on as a user with administrative rights. Right-click a batch in the Control Center “Current Workload” display.  If you just want to view the basic throughput statistics. point to Task.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Batch Control Workgroup and Enterprise customers can commit. 2. To perform an action on a batch 1. On the Action menu. 4. discard. Enter the new login Name and Password. 3. The Batch Properties dialog box for the selected batch opens. and pause batches from Control Center rather than having individual Verifier operators perform these tasks. every time you start TeleForm Control Center. Using Control Center for batch disposition frees your Verifier resources to concentrate on Quality Control and correction tasks. • • 244 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . If your evaluation efficiency is still problematic:  Re-design one or more of your forms. you may need to reconfigure either your TeleForm Reader station settings. your global capture processing settings. 5. or your form or document design. View the Workflow tab of the System folder. Try changing your local or global settings.Control Center NOTE TeleForm Control Center users must have permissions to run Control Center or be the TeleForm Administrator to successfully run Control Center.  Purchase additional Reader licenses. and then process a batch of forms with these new settings. 1. Use Control Center to Resolve Inefficiency To diagnose inefficiency between your Verifier operators and Reader stations. 2. 4. Repeat steps 1-3 until you have increased TeleForm Reader efficiency. If the average time to evaluate an image seems too long. Look in the Evaluate column. 3. and see if any of these statistics point to the problem. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 245 • • • . Provides a centralized view of all errors logged by all TeleForm modules. change the Refresh Time(s) value. Provides a list of all running TeleForm modules and indicates how long they have been running. Start TeleForm Monitor You may want to run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center to give you access to both TeleForm management modules. how long they have been working on the current task. Verifier operator or Scan Station operator is working on and how long the application has locked the batch or items in the batch. Shows which batches a Reader. See “Monitor Active Tasks” on page 247 for more information. The TeleForm Monitor window opens.  Active Batches. It can show you the status of each workstation as well as the status of each image that is currently being processed by TeleForm Reader. To run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center 1. refer to “Analyze Your System Throughput” on page 295. TeleForm Monitor Overview The TeleForm Monitor has four tabs:  Applications. If you want. Provides the same list of images previously shown in TeleForm Monitor but also provides a great deal of additional information. 3. and more. 2. TeleForm Monitor TeleForm Monitor is used to oversee the fundamentals of each TeleForm workstation.  Image Queue. • • 246 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm For more information on improving efficiency. how long it has been since the last status update. select Applications > TeleForm > Utilities > TeleForm Monitor. what they are currently doing.  Error Log. TeleForm Monitor refreshes the information it displays every specified number of seconds. From the Windows Start menu. You can filter the list by Workstation. See “Monitor Queued Images” on page 248 for more information. Application and Age.  The TeleForm application the workstation is running. Stalled The TeleForm application is currently stalled. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 247 • • • . the following information is displayed for each workstation running TeleForm over the network:  The name of the TeleForm workstation. Idle The TeleForm application is currently running but not actively performing a task.TeleForm Monitor Monitor Active Tasks Under Active Tasks in the TeleForm Monitor window.The following table lists possible status values for each TeleForm application Status Meaning Active The TeleForm application is currently being used. The status of each TeleForm application running over the network. and are waiting to be evaluated by a TeleForm Reader workstation. Monitor Queued Images In the Image Queue list on the TeleForm Monitor window. Check the workstation running TeleForm Reader for the specific problem. workstations are reported as Stalled if their system times are significantly different (more than two minutes) from the workstation running Monitor. and then select View on the Image menu. the image is removed from the queue. If you are unable to do this. For example. a 'file locked' message opens. TeleForm Administration Guide . These images were scanned. click on the image in the Image Queue list. then click Delete Stalled Task on the Task menu of Monitor. or automatically retrieved from directory into TeleForm. If possible. Bad Images A Bad Image status can be caused by:  • • 248 •• • • A bad image file (a file that is actually damaged).  If you want. you can view. to view an image.Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm Status Meaning TeleForm Reader Evaluate TeleForm Reader is evaluating an image. save. Often. TeleForm Reader Stalled TeleForm Reader is stalled.  Use the Image Queue list to monitor TeleForm’s progress as it processes images. clear the problem at the workstation.  If you attempt to view a queued image through Monitor while the file is being evaluated or viewed by another workstation. print or delete an image in the Image Queue list using the Monitor menu commands. a list of images is displayed.  You cannot delete an image from the TeleForm Monitor if the image is part of a batch. faxed. Consider having all workstations synchronize their clocks from the TeleForm Server each time they log on or re-start. TeleForm Reader Idle TeleForm Reader is waiting for images to process.  After a file has been retrieved for evaluation by Reader. went to the TeleForm network directory. the Verifier’s status bar reflects the status of each field during the correction process. this means that TeleForm Reader had a problem processing one or more fields on the image. Select the image in the Image Queue b. Click File > Delete. The image that generated the Bad Evaluation in TeleForm Monitor also displays the Bad Evaluation status in Verifier’s Image Management dialog. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 249 • • • . If a Bad Image is found in the TeleForm Monitor’s Image Queue. If this occurs occasionally. b. Discard and reprocess the batch. When the problem field is found. a. Select the image in the Image Queue and note the path of the image in the TeleForm Monitor’s status bar. To remove a bad image  If the image is not part of a batch. However. the Verifier status bar indicates a status of Bad Evaluation and the field(s) that caused the problem are displayed. The image was evaluated and passed on to Verifier. This path indicates which batch the bad image belongs to. When the Verifier operator opens the image and corrects it.  If the image is part of a batch. the image cannot be deleted.TeleForm Monitor  A file that TeleForm does not recognize as one of its supported image formats. correct the field as you normally would and the image completes the verification process and exports with no problems. Bad Evaluations If an image in the Image Queue list has a Bad Evaluation status. if you receive this message frequently. you should contact Autonomy Cardiff Technical Support. a. the image should be removed. Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm • • 250 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Use the Purge Log. Maintain System Performance CHAPTER 14 This chapter describes how to maintain your TeleForm system. Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup at regular intervals. we recommend the following maintenance measures:  Run ScanDisk. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 251 • • • . you accumulate hundreds or even thousands of image files on your hard drive in just a short time. The constant cycle of deleting files and receiving new ones inevitably causes fragmentation on your system's hard drive.  General Maintenance Tips  Run Windows Utilities  Use the Purge Log  Use Database Utilities  Archive Images  Delete Old Image Zone Files General Maintenance Tips As you use TeleForm. To optimize your system's integrity and performance.  Use Database Utilities as appropriate Run Windows Utilities Windows includes several built-in utilities to help you keep your hard drive in optimum operating order. The Purge Log provides a systematic way to delete old and unwanted images from your hard drive. they are fragmented) and rejoins them. Defragmenting also consolidates the free space on your hard drive. ensuring that you always have enough disk space to accommodate your incoming data. ScanDisk ScanDisk checks your hard drive for lost file fragments. You can direct Disk Cleanup to delete some or all of those files. The ScanDisk utility detects and repairs these situations before they can cause problems. NOTE You must close all TeleForm applications on the workstation prior to running these utilities. Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches your drive for temporary files. Use the Purge Log Use TeleForm’s Purge Log to automatically delete old files from your hard disk. making it faster and easier to write new information to the disk. Disk Defragmenter This utility locates files that have been stored in several different locations on the disk (that is.Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance  Archive images.  Delete old Image Zone files. and cross-linked files which can slow performance and even cause errors. You have two options for triggering the purge function: • • 252 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . internet cache files. invalid file names. allowing these files to be located and read much more quickly. and unnecessary program files that you can safely delete. Scheduling purges for the weekend.Use the Purge Log  Manual. 4. 3. Both methods allow you to specify the age of the files to be deleted. or on-demand. Select the type of records you want to remove. While you can purge files manually with the Purge now function. Manual Purge With the Purge Log To open the purge log 1. for example. Scheduled Purges By default. Choose the purge method from the Purge checked events section. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 253 • • • . excluding NonForms and any images. can keep your TeleForm Reader station process forms more efficiently during the week. From the Utilities menu. Purge settings are described in “Purge Events” on page 254. 2. the Purge Log is set to purge your TeleForm files after they have been on your system for seven days. or use the standard automatic purge feature. the Purge Log is configured to delete files after they have been on your hard drive for 7 days. at a scheduled time. The Purge Log dialog box opens.  Automatic. By default. with the Purge now button. click Purge Log. Start TeleForm Designer or TeleForm Reader. you can also schedule your purges so they occur at a convenient time. 2. define when the purge takes place. Choose the files to purge. 4. 3. select the Automatic checkbox. From the Utilities menu. The Purge Log dialog box opens. You can choose from:  Weeks  Days  Hours  Seconds 7. The available events are described on “Purge Events” on page 254. These are not files.Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance To create a purge schedule 1. The Schedule dialog box opens. printed. Send/Print/Reminders Check this box if you want to purge records of forms that were scheduled to be faxed. Purge Events The following paragraphs describe the events that can be purged. Click OK on the Schedule and Purge Log dialog boxes. select those types of events that you want to automatically remove from the form log. In the Purge checked events section. just records of past events. click Purge Log. Start TeleForm Designer or TeleForm Reader. Receives Check this box if you want to purge records of all received (faxed or scanned) forms. 6. Click the Schedule button. Expected Returns Check this box if you want to purge records of forms sent with the Track Expected Returns option selected. E-Forms These are records of forms completed using the NonForm Data Entry utility or TeleForm Internet Server records needing review. On the Schedule dialog box. Completed Tracking Records In the Completed Tracking Records section. 5. or that used the Send Reminder option. • • 254 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . refer to the TeleForm Help. You cannot automatically purge images with the status Needs Review. Stored Images In the Stored Images section. since they contain data that has not been processed yet. These files can be deleted manually from the Form Log or TeleForm Verifier's Stored Images window. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 255 • • • .Use Database Utilities Deleted Data/Exports These are records of files that have been deleted and of forms that have been auto exported or manually exported from TeleForm. You can choose to purge images with the status Non Form. you can choose to purge:  Batches that have been completed (that is. Labels & Zones. Other Events In the Other events section. select the types of image files that you want to purge. or all of these. The following functions can be performed from the Database Utilities program:  Clear lock records  Rescan unique file database  Purge\rescan unique file database  Change next batch ID  Run Diagnostic Tests For more information about Database Utilities. they have been committed or discarded)  TeleForm Reader statistics  TeleForm Verifier statistics Use Database Utilities Use TeleForm’s Database Utilities occasionally to optimize your system's integrity. Evaluated OK. select Archived Directory Images. An evaluated image is processed exactly the same as if it were an incoming fax or newly scanned image because of image pre-processing. In Verifier.Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance Archive Images TeleForm Verifier has a built-in archiving feature that allows you to remove any number of form images from standard TeleForm activity and store their image files in the \BAK subdirectory. From the Image menu. In the Forms list. To view an image. In the Image Management dialog box. select the forms to archive from the Stored Images list. 5. You are prompted as to how you want to handle the images after they are archived. on the Options menu. • • 256 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 3. The selected images are archived to the \BAK subdirectory.  Click Yes if you want to delete the images after they have been archived. 2. click Archive. Start TeleForm Verifier. Select Show Archived Images. click View Results and Image or double-click on it. To save additional hard disk space. Click Yes or No to archive the files. Archived images can be re-evaluated directly using the TeleForm Reader Evaluate Image command. click Image Management. 2. or click the Options button to the right of the Image Management dialog box. Archiving old files reduces overhead so TeleForm can better track your current files but it does not compress the images. All the archived images for that form are displayed in the Stored Images list. The Image Management Options dialog box opens. 4. select it from the list and on the Image menu.  Click No to leave the original files in Verifier. you may manually copy archived files from the \BAK subdirectory to another disk or drive. To archive forms 1. 3. These files are no longer listed with the TeleForm Verifier stored images unless the Show Archived Images option is selected. To review archived images 1. and click OK. 4. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 257 • • • .Delete Old Image Zone Files NOTE Archived images selected through the Image Management Options cannot be evaluated by using the Re-Evaluate As command in Verifier. TeleForm tracks these images as part of the standard purge operations. Delete Old Image Zone Files If your Image Zones use the Store images in separate file option. you can easily accumulate a number of these graphic files. They can only be evaluated directly from TeleForm Reader. You can delete these files when you are certain that you no longer need the information that they contain by opening the Labels dialog box from the Utilities menu of TeleForm Designer and TeleForm Reader. Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance • • 258 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . This chapter includes the following sections. This feature requires:  A sophisticated understanding of source control principles. CAUTION A lack of preparation or understanding of any of these requirements can cause your TeleForm system to experience serious problems when revision control is enabled.  Prerequisites  Precautionary Notes  Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe  Revision Control Tasks  Use Revision Control in TeleForm TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 259 • • • .  Knowledge of TeleForm configuration steps  Training of the TeleForm operators who will use the revision control function. Read this entire chapter before making any changes to your TeleForm system in regard to revision control. Revision Control CHAPTER 15 This chapter describes how to use Revision Control with TeleForm. the SourceSafe client must be installed on your AutoMerge Publisher workstations. • • 260 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  You must use Microsoft Visual SourceSafe as your revision control software. This product is the only source control software certified for use with TeleForm.  To create new merges or modify existing ones. the following prerequisites must be met:  You must run TeleForm 8 or later. To configure TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 1. IMPORTANT Autonomy Cardiff strongly recommends that these set up steps be performed by an experienced SourceSafe administrator. Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe Configuring TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe is a three step process.  The Microsoft Visual SourceSafe client must be installed on every TeleForm Designer workstation that moves TeleForm items into and out of revision control. IMPORTANT Autonomy Cardiff strongly recommends that an experienced Microsoft Visual SourceSafe administrator is involved in setting up your SourceSafe database. IMPORTANT This chapter should not be considered a substitute for reading the documentation provided with SourceSafe. client installations. Earlier versions of TeleForm do not support revision control. Configure SourceSafe. and TeleForm configuration.Chapter 15 Revision Control Prerequisites To use revision control with TeleForm. Every Designer and AutoMerge Publisher workstation on your TeleForm system must have the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe client installed. Add the network login names of your Designer and AutoMerge Publisher operators to the list of SourceSafe users. Enable the Use network name for automatic user login option. The Designer operators are able to move items in and out of revision control without being prompted to login to SourceSafe. 3. The operators who will work at these stations should be thoroughly trained on SourceSafe in general and the specific interaction of SourceSafe and TeleForm before they begin working.Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe 2. 6. To add network logon names to SourceSafe 1. From the Tools menu. 2. Configure SourceSafe To configure SourceSafe. 4. 5. The AutoMerge Publisher operators are able to merge data onto forms that are subject to revision control without being prompted to login to SourceSafe. 3. NOTE Cardiff recommends that you take advantage of the Use network name for automatic user login function in SourceSafe. Configure TeleForm. you must install the SourceSafe client and add the network logon names to SourceSafe. Start the SourceSafe Administrator program. Enable TeleForm Security. The following rights are recommended:  Run Designer  Run AutoMerge Publisher  Create Forms  Open Forms  Delete Forms TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 261 • • • . select Options. Enable TeleForm Security Cardiff strongly recommends that you enable the TeleForm Security function and limit the security rights for the Designer and AutoMerge Publisher operators. No to stop the process of configuring revision control. click Configuration. 4. Select the Enable checkbox. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box. You are prompted to Select or add the base project. From the Utilities menu. 6. The Select Revision Control Provider dialog box opens. 5. To link SourceSafe to TeleForm 1. and as such you should seriously consider disabling them:  Administrator  Configure Designer  Configure AutoMerge Publisher See “Security” on page 85 for more information about TeleForm Security. 2. Start TeleForm Designer. Configure TeleForm SourceSafe must already be installed and functional before you can link it to TeleForm.Chapter 15 Revision Control  Import/Export Forms The following rights would allow an operator to modify the revision control settings in TeleForm. 3. open the Multiuser Features > Revision Control tab. This dialog box is automatically populated with the revision control clients found on your computer. Click Yes to continue. Choose your revision control software and click OK. • • 262 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 263 • • • . On the Add to SourceSafe Project dialog box. 9.Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe 7. Click OK on the Revision Control tab. password (if any) and use the Browse button to select the SourceSafe database. select an existing project or type the name of a new project. type your user name. On the Visual SourceSafe Login dialog box. 8. This button launches a control dialog box from SourceSafe. Revision Control Tasks The following table lists the revision control tasks that can be performed and what program they should be initiated in: TeleForm or Microsoft Visual SourceSafe. • • 264 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .  Options. Cardiff recommends that you link to a database that is available to all users. See your SourceSafe documentation for more information on this tool. This field shows the root directory of Microsoft Visual SourceSafe.Chapter 15 Revision Control  Aux Label. Revision Control is a multiuser feature. This field displays the project in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database to which your form and Shape Library files are added and from which they are checked in and out.  Base Project. No Yes Retrieve read-only copies of files stored in Microsoft Visual SourceSafe. Task TeleForm SourceSafe Rename items Yes NO Add items to revision control Yes NO Check in items Yes NO Check out items Yes NO Run History command Yes NO Run Differences command Yes NO Delete folders or forms that are subject to revision control Yes NO Search for deleted items No Yes Create Base Project in Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database for storing TeleForm item.Revision Control Tasks As a general principle. This task should be performed periodically by an experienced SourceSafe administrator. See “Precautionary Notes” on page 266 for a list of problems that can occur if you perform tasks in the wrong application. No Yesa TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 265 • • • . Yes Yes (Not recommended) Purge items that have been deleted from within TeleForm. you should never do anything from Microsoft Visual SourceSafe that you can do from TeleForm. When these links are broken. You can use the Validate Files function to recover locked files. checking out. You cannot open. Locking Files in TeleForm.  • • 266 •• • • Yellow form folders are not subject to revision control. export. you break the link between TeleForm and SourceSafe. If you rename or move folders or files from within Microsoft Visual SourceSafe. No warning message opens.Chapter 15 Revision Control a. you should NOT manage the projects and files that have been added to SourceSafe through the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe interface. As noted throughout this manual. See “Validate Files” on page 273 for more information. Forms that are checked out of revision control are given “read and write” access. move. If you delete a project from within Microsoft Visual SourceSafe. there are different icons to identify files and folders which are included in revision control. Use Revision Control in TeleForm Revision control commands can be initiated from TeleForm Designer and the Shape Library. The Get command should only be initiated from Microsoft Visual SourceSafe if you must recover from a massive loss of TeleForm data. Only in rare instances should you perform any revision control tasks from SourceSafe itself. Use the controls in TeleForm to manage your revision controlled items. Breaking Revision Control Links. and deleting files from revision control. adding files to revision control. TeleForm Administration Guide . you cannot perform the most basic source control functions. or delete them from within Designer or AutoMerge Publisher. even if the imported form represents an older version of that form. rename. those items are locked and unavailable for use in TeleForm. Improper usage can cause problems such as: Overwriting Forms via the Import Command. the imported form overwrites the checked out form. Revision Control in Designer In TeleForm Designer. and this project contains TeleForm items. such as checking in. If a form designer imports a form that has the same name as the checked out form. Precautionary Notes The revision control feature can cause your TeleForm system to behave unexpectedly if it is not properly configured and used. To access the revision control commands in Designer  Right-click a folder or form in the Select Form(s) dialog box.  Red check marks next to forms show that they are checked out.Use Revision Control in TeleForm  Gray form folders have been added to revision control.  Click a revision control command to perform that action on the form or folder. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 267 • • • . Revision Control Tasks After you have enabled revision control.Chapter 15 Revision Control Revision Control in the Shape Library To access the revision control commands in the Shape Library. The entire Shape Library file (GLS file) is subjected to revision control. You cannot place the shapes within the Shape Library in revision control. check in. form designers can perform the following tasks: • • 268 •• • •  Add Items to Revision Control  Remove from Revision Control  Check out  Check in  History  Difference  Validate Files TeleForm Administration Guide . use the Library menu. and difference commands are performed on the entire GLS file. The check out. history. The following items can be added to revision control:  Form folders (must be added prior to adding forms)  Forms  Shape Library Glossary files (GLS) NOTE When you add a form to revision control. all the sub-folders contained within that folder are also added to revision control. merge definitions. and any graphic files that are part of the form. If you add a form folder to revision control and select the Add sub-folders (recursively) option. right-click the folder in the Select Form(s) or Delete Form(s) dialog boxes in TeleForm Designer and select the Add to revision control command. This package cannot be split apart and the constituent parts added to revision control separately. To make the file editable. the current versions of images and scripts are embedded in the TCD. The copy of the file in the TeleForm directory structure is assigned a status of Read-only. Before a TCD file is added to revision control or checked in. it is copied to the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database. To add form folders to revision control. you are actually adding a “package” of files (a TCD file) that includes the TeleForm form definition.Use Revision Control in TeleForm Add Items to Revision Control When an item is placed in revision control. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 269 • • • . Add form folders to revision control You must add the form folders that contain forms you wish to add to revision control before you can add the forms themselves. you must use the Check out command. You cannot edit these files unless you check them out or remove them from revision control. scripts that are associated with the form. so they can be extracted at a later time.  Add the folder and any sub-folders (all of which become projects in SourceSafe). Previously Removed Files If you add an item to revision control after previously removing it. Select the Add forms checkbox. sub-folders. The file on your local hard drive is added to SourceSafe. Do not select either of the checkboxes.  No. When an item is checked out of SourceSafe. Check out You can Check out forms and Shape Library files after they have been added to revision control. the file that is stored in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database is copied to the corresponding • • 270 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The file that had previously been removed from revision control must be purged at some time.  Add the folder. The file on your local hard drive are replaced by the file in SourceSafe which you had previously removed from revision control. you are notified that “A deleted file of this name already exists in SourceSafe. Select both the Add forms and the Add sub-folders (recursively) checkboxes. and forms these folders contain. Select the Add sub-folders (recursively) checkbox. Do you want to recover the deleted file instead of adding your local” file?  Yes.Chapter 15 Revision Control The Add to Revision Control dialog box allows you to choose from the following options:  Add only the folder (which becomes a project in SourceSafe).  Add the folder and the forms it contains. When you initiate a Check in command. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 271 • • • . since these folders cannot be checked out. Undo check out The Undo check out command undoes changes that have been made to an item since it was checked out. NOTE You cannot Check out form folders. The file in TeleForm is assigned a status of Read-Write. Undo check out works only on files that have been checked out. You cannot check out a file until it has been added to SourceSafe. the Check In dialog box opens. Instead. NOTE You cannot check in form folders. When an item is checked in. To check in forms 1. You can edit and modify files that have been checked out. The copy of the item in your local TeleForm structure is not checked back in to SourceSafe. the file in your local TeleForm directory structure is assigned a status of read-only and cannot be modified. the copy of the file in SourceSafe is retained and copied out to your local TeleForm directory structure. A copy of this file is added to the SourceSafe database.Use Revision Control in TeleForm location in the TeleForm directory structure. Check in You can check in forms and Shape Library files after they have been added to revision control and are checked-out. merge setups. if desired. To view any Comments that were applied to the item when it was checked in. You cannot run a History report on form folders.  When run on a form.Chapter 15 Revision Control 2. Comments can be viewed in the History > Details dialog box. • • 272 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . and graphic files are stored with the form for each version checked in. History This command displays a record of the changes to a file since it was initially added to revision control. Difference The Difference command compares the copy of a file that is stored in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database with the copy of the same file stored on your local TeleForm directory structure. A dialog box containing a summary of the revision control tasks that have been performed on the item is generated. You can run a History report on forms and Shape Library files after they have been added to revision control. You can use the History command to retrieve previous versions of a form or GLS file. NOTE You cannot run a Difference command on form folders. but no detailed information on the differences is made available. available by running the History command. Restoring a previous version also restores the scripts and merge setups for that version. click the Details button.  When run on a Shape Library file. the Difference command detects whether the saved version of the form within your TeleForm directory differs from that stored in the SourceSafe database. Add a Comment. You are notified if there are any differences. You are notified that the files are identical or that they differ. This command does not produce a summary explaining the exact differences between the SourceSafe and TeleForm versions of the files. Scripts. Differences are not apparent until you Save the modified Shape Library file on your local TeleForm directory. the Difference command triggers a binary file comparison without regard to contents.  If you are experiencing problems with the internal tables listed below. tflogex The following list explains the conditions and actions that may require use of the Validate Files command. tfgrpfld.  After removing or renaming a SourceSafe project corresponding to a TeleForm form folder from SourceSafe.  If files in the TeleForm directories have been manually manipulated from outside the TeleForm system. Validate Command The Validate Files command initiates the following sequence of events: TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 273 • • • .  After restoring your TeleForm system from backup tape. tfgrpmem  Merge Setup Records.  After using the Get command from SourceSafe. such as with Windows Explorer.  Form Table. tffldr. tfidtbl  Form Folder. it is not a magic bullet for repairing any TeleForm problem. Recognition Set Tables. tffldmem  Group Folder Tables. The Validate Files command affects six TeleForm database tables.Use Revision Control in TeleForm Validate Files The Validate Files command is designed to fix some common user and system errors. While it is safe to use at any time and can repair certain types of damage. You should reinstall TeleForm after the restoration but before running the Validate Files command.  Make sure that all forms which are subject to revision control and are not checked out have read-only status. Validates the Security Groups. Backups of entries are kept in GROUP_<name>. 4. Validates the Recognition Set folders. 3. Invalid entries are removed.INI files in case of table loss. This file contains enough information to re-register the folder in the folder table should the table get lost due to a system failure or the folder is restored from revision control. merge setups.INI files in case of table loss) 6. tfxxxxx. Checks the folder tables to make sure that all entries are valid. the state is repaired.  Verification that there are no duplicate form files (same form in multiple folders). TeleForm 7 and earlier used different file extensions than TeleForm 8 forms. Duplicate files are moved to the TELEFORM\FRM\ $DUPLICATES folder. graphics. Backups of entries are kept in RECSET_<name>.  Validation that the form table record lists the correct form version based on the filename. Fragments are moved to the TELEFORM\FRM\ $REMOVED folder.e. Invalid entries are removed.) are present and correct for the version of the form (TCD file) on the local • • 274 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2. you are prompted as to which copy to keep.  Check that the package of form files (scripts. Scans TeleForm’s form folders to make sure that they are registered in the form folder tables. Each folder is subject to the following actions:  Validation using the FOLDER.  Elimination of form fragments (i. 5.  Verifies that forms which are subject to revision control and are checked out have read-write status.INI file. Checks the form table to make sure that all entries have a valid form file. etc. Scans all the form folders to validate revision control status of forms and folders:  Checks that revision controlled TeleForm folders are also present in the revision control system. If any duplicate forms are found.  Checks that forms which are not subject to revision control have read-write status.  Verification that forms in the folder are registered in the form table and folder member table.00x files from versions earlier than TeleForm 8). If not.Chapter 15 Revision Control 1. the Remove From Revision Control dialog box opens:  Folder. Select Validate Files from the Operation list in the TeleForm Migration Utility. This field shows what folder was selected for the Remove from revision control command. Remove from Revision Control When a folder is removed from revision control. If you remove a specific form or GLS file from revision control. Right-click a folder in the Select Form(s) dialog box in Designer. Select the Validate files at next startup option from the Global & Local TeleForm Settings > Designer > Advanced dialog box. Remove Folders from Revision Control When removing a folder from revision control. 3.Use Revision Control in TeleForm hard disk. you can choose to either delete the copy of the folder in the SourceSafe database or leave this project in SourceSafe but disconnect the “link” between it and the folder in the TeleForm directory structure. This check is important if a Get command is performed from the SourceSafe client. the matching copy of the file is deleted from the SourceSafe directory. it is deleted from the SourceSafe database. The process of removing forms and library files from revision control differs from that used to remove form folders from revision control. Remove forms and library files from revision control When you remove a form or GLS file from revision control. You cannot edit this field. To trigger the Validate Files command 1. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 275 • • • . The TeleForm file is assigned a status of Read-Write. 2. You cannot remove a form or GLS file from revision control when it is checked out. TeleForm Administration Guide . the forms are removed from revision control but remain in the SourceSafe database. When this option is enabled. Recursive means that all the sub-folders contained within that folder are also affected.  • • 276 •• • • Remove sub-folders (recursively).Chapter 15 Revision Control  Remove forms. The versions of the forms on your hard drive remain. all the forms in the selected Folder are removed from revision control and deleted from the SourceSafe database. This option is always selected. If you do not select this option. The versions of the forms on your hard drive remain. Changing the appearance or layout of a form template in your system that has been activated and distributed can cause recognition errors when returned forms (using the old form template) are processed in your system. Analyze Form Design CHAPTER 16 This chapter covers which Control Center features to use in optimizing the design of one or more of your forms. and then distribute the updated form. If you wish to change the appearance of your form. you edit the form and run a new batch of forms through the TeleForm system. To avoid such problems. IMPORTANT Once your form is activated.  Overview  Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level  Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 277 • • • . If you determine that a form needs to be optimized. save the form under a different name. You view the By Form tabs of the Readers and Verifiers sub-folders and the Current Workload folder. activate the updated form. Remember to stop distributing the old form as well. always thoroughly test your forms before you distribute them. you must be very careful if you change the appearance of it. Before you commit the time and money to mass produce your form. evaluation and verification process. You may need to change your form template in order to optimize the efficiency of its evaluation in TeleForm Reader and its correction in TeleForm Verifier. you do not need to save the form under a different name in order to make these changes. do not affect the appearance of your form.Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design Overview If a form is not properly designed or has not been optimized.. you should test your form design.. or remove a current field from the form. This form would have a negative impact on the processing of its images. For this reason. You cannot. it is often necessary to adjust the size/location of a field on the form. remove. add a new field to the form. Therefore. Some changes. Generally speaking.. it can significantly slow down the identification. such as changing a field from accepting alphanumeric characters to accepting alphabetic characters only. it is highly recommended that you thoroughly test your form before distributing it in large quantities. Add. and it can also have a negative impact on the processing of all other forms. you can still change the field constraints and other recognition • • 278 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . If you do this. Most changes that affect the appearance of the form require you to save the form under a new name and activate the updated form.. This type of change is good to focus on if you have already distributed a large number of forms. Even though editing an activated form limits your optimization possibilities. you cannot evaluate previous versions of the form using the new and improved form template because there is no current form template to match the (old) returned image against. or edit field titles Move a data field or a group Create/break grouped fields Change the size/length of a data field Add or move lines and shapes Add new fields to the form Change export settings Move the Form ID Modify field ID names Move the reference marks In order to optimize the performance of a form. The following table summarizes the types of changes you can and cannot make with activated forms: You can. this type of change can be saved to your current form template. A single form that is poorly or hastily designed can cause inefficiency in the whole TeleForm system. save the activated form. and activate the updated form. Display one or more of the following tabs:  By Form tab of the Readers sub-folder (under the System folder. These changes can greatly enhance field interpretation in TeleForm Reader and can speed up the review process in TeleForm Verifier. Both the period and the frequency of the statistics collection is set up in the Data tab of the Control Center Properties dialog box for more information on specifying the parameters of statistics collection for your TeleForm system).Overview settings in the Field Attributes dialog boxes. 4. Process a new batch of form images. Form Statistics Form statistics are online statistics that are generated in real-time. 3. and updated with an administrator-specified frequency. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 279 • • • . then save the form under a different name. General Procedure for Analyzing Form Design When you examine your form design. and the one of the By Forms tabs) 2. View the statistics displayed in these tabs. They are based upon statistical information gathered during an administrator-specified period. choose Statistics. choose Statistics)  By Form tab of the Current Workload folder (under the System folder. If you determine that one of your forms is not being processed efficiently.  If TeleForm does not allow you to save these changes to your activated form.  If these changes can be made to the activated form. and have identified an area that needs improvement. make the necessary changes to the form. you can use three different statistical groups:  TeleForm Reader statistics  TeleForm Verifier statistics  Statistics of the current workload To analyze form design in Control Center 1. choose Statistics)  By Form tab of the Verifiers sub-folder (under the System folder. View the statistics again to determine if the processing of this form has improved. Verifiers Displays TeleForm Verifier statistics in a table format and a chart format for your choice of User Statistics.Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design 5. Form Statistics. or Active Workstations. Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level Application statistics apply to specific applications within TeleForm. • • 280 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . If you have already processed one or more batches of your form. Readers Displays TeleForm Reader statistics in a table format and a chart format for your choice of Statistics or Active Workstations. sub-folders are displayed underneath it. When you double-click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree. these statistics provide you with the best information to analyze what has occurred. For example.Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level Viewing Evaluation Statistics for Your Forms When you view the evaluation statistics for your form. Time column of the By Form tab indicates that one of your forms is taking an average of 20 seconds per instance to evaluate. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 281 • • • . if the Avg. and which forms are evaluated quickly. The following figure illustrates a typical By Form tab. you should investigate why evaluation for this form takes longer than the evaluation of your other forms. you can see which forms take a long time to evaluate. Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design Reader Chart The Form Chart displays the number of evaluated images that were evaluated OK versus the number that needed review in TeleForm Verifier. • • 282 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level Verifier Charts Workflow Tab tab displays workflow statistics for individual forms. See “View Verification Statistics for Your Form” on page 286 for details on each column. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 283 • • • Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design Average Times Tab This chart displays the average time required to verify a single instance of each form. • • 284 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level Total Times Tab The Total Times chart gives you a visual representation of the time it took to correct all instances of each form, divided into the individual modes of correction. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 285 • • • Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design View Verification Statistics for Your Form These statistics show which forms require a lot of time to correct and which are corrected quickly. For example, if the Avg. Time column indicates that one of your forms is taking an average of 1 minute to correct, you should investigate the statistics of this form and change the form template if necessary. • • 286 •• • • Stat Description Value Form Shows the name of this form. String of text Completed Shows the number of form images that have completed verification. Integer (1, 2, 3...) TeleForm Administration Guide Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level Stat Description Value Need Review Shows the number of form images in the TeleForm Verifier queue. Form images in this category still need to be corrected by the Verifier operator. Integer (1, 2, 3...) Avg. Time Shows the average time required to correct a form image. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Time to Complete Shows an estimate of the time required to correct the remaining form images in the TeleForm Verifier queue. Time Format (H:MM:SS) NOTE: The estimate assumes that a single Verifier operator is correcting this form. You need to take this into account if there are multiple Verifier operators correcting this form. Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level Current workload statistics apply to batches of forms that are currently being processed in TeleForm. View these statistics if you are processing your first batch or group of batches of this form, and you want to get an idea of how efficiently they are being processed. Even if the batch contains a mixture of forms (instead of just a single form), you can view the current workload statistics for a single form to analyze its form design. When you click the Current Workload folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree, the current workload statistics are shown in the display pane. There are two form tabs in this pane:  By Form - Displays the current workload statistics for each form in the group of batches, in a table format  By Form - Displays the current workload statistics for each form, in a chart format View Current Workload Statistics for Your Form When you click the By Form tab of the Current Workload folder, it is shown in the display pane. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 287 • • • Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the By Form tab of the Current Workload folder. Each row in this tab corresponds to a form in your TeleForm system. Stat Description Value Form Name of this form. Text Completed Shows the number of form images that have completed verification. Integer Need Review Shows the number of form images in the TeleForm Verifier queue. Form images in this category still need to be corrected by the Verifier operator. Integer Avg. Time Shows the average time required to correct a single image of this form. Time Format Time to Complete Shows an estimate of the time required to process the remaining images for the current group of batches. Time Format By Form Chart The Total Times chart gives you a visual representation of the time it took to correct all instances of each form. This time is divided into the individual modes of correction. • • 288 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide 3. Fields to Review Shows the average number of fields that needed review per form image.3 seconds Avg.0 Pages Read Shows the combined number of images (form pages) that were evaluated for all of your forms. 4.2 Always Review Shows the average number of fields per form page with the Always Review configuration.Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level Generate Form Reports In addition to the online form statistics described in the previous sections. These reports are Crystal Reports that are generated for a specified time interval. 500 Avg.4 seconds Avg. 4. : Statistic Description Sample Pages Read Number of images (form pages) that were evaluated for this form. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined.8 seconds Long Eval Time (sec. Eval Time (sec. 1. The list of available reports is shown in the display pane.3 seconds Short Eval Time (sec.) Shows the average time (in seconds) required to evaluate a single form image. 10. there are also Form reports. 2.) Shows the minimum time (in seconds) it took to evaluate a single page of this form. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined. Click on the Reports folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree. 3. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined.2 Always Review Fields per Page Shows the average number of fields per form page with the Always Review configuration. 500 Avg. Fields to Review Shows the average number of fields that needed review for this form. Double-click on the name of the report you wish to generate. 2. Eval Time (sec.) Shows the maximum time (in seconds) it took to evaluate a single page of this form. for this form.) Shows the average time (in seconds) required to evaluate a single page of this form.0 FORMS/NONFORMS Fields per Page TOTAL TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 289 • • • . Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design Form Correction Summary Report The following figure illustrates a typical Form Correction Summary report. With this report. The Form Correction Summary shows you the average time it took to correct your form. The following table describes each column in the Form Correction Summary report: • • 290 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . you can compare your forms to determine which ones are being corrected efficiently and which ones need to be optimized. and the average number of characters on your form that needed review for the specified time interval. 0 TOTAL (form name in bold) The total row (which is shown as the form name in bold) shows the statistics of all of the form pages combined. 18. 2. This counts the form pages that were evaluated OK by TeleForm Reader 0. and so on Page Count Shows the total number of pages processed for this form page. Dave’s Form Form Page Shows the page number of this form.03 Average Char Correct Shows the average number of characters per form page that were corrected. 8.9 seconds Average Char Visit Shows the average number of characters per form page that needed review. This does not count the form pages that were evaluated OK by TeleForm Reader. 1. 5.Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level Form Correction Statistic Description Sample Value(s) Form Name Shows the name of this form. as specified in the Save As dialog box of TeleForm Designer.32 Form Punts Shows the total number of form pages that this operator transferred to another operator (including the Supervisor). Each form page has its own row of statistics.995 Average Time Shows the average time (in seconds) required to correct this form page. See the FORM PAGE statistics for a description of each column in this row TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 291 • • • .21 Average Field Visit Shows the average number of fields that were visited on this form page 2. The Form Detail report displays statistics for individual fields on the specified form. This report can be used to analyze the evaluation and correction process on a field level. For example. instead of the form level (which is the lowest level you can view in your online statistics). if you notice that a “Street Address” Image Zone needs frequent review. you might consider using a Print Field instead. this report points you to the inefficiencies in your form design. Chars Shows the average number of characters that this field contains 4. for the specified time interval.Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design Form Detail Report More than any other. The following table describes each column in the Form Detail report: • • 292 •• • • Statistic Description Sample Value Field Name Shows the field ID of this field firstName Field Type Shows the type of TeleForm data entry field that this field is Constrained Filled Shows the percentage of the time that this field is filled in on the returned forms 100% Avg.0 TeleForm Administration Guide . Chars Need Review Shows the average number of characters in this field that need review. N Avg. 0.Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level Statistic Description Sample Value Need Review Shows the percentage of the time that this field needs review 14% Must Review (Y/N) Shows whether or not this field has the Always Review configuration. This helps you determine the significance of the Need Review column.0 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 293 • • • . Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design • • 294 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . you start by viewing the summary statistics of your TeleForm system. you can then view more detailed statistics. Analyze Your System Throughput CHAPTER 17 This chapter covers how to use Control Center’s features in your analysis of the TeleForm system throughput. This procedure helps you identify areas in your form processing that could benefit from re-configuration and optimization.  Overview of Throughput Analysis  General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput  Analyze Throughput on a Global Level  Analyze Throughput on an Application Level  Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level  Generate System Throughput Reports  Available Reports  System Performance Report  User Performance Report  Verifier Productivity Charts  Batch Summary Report  Form Evaluation Summary Report TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 295 • • • . If you find a significant summary statistic. Typically. For example. A bottleneck occurs when one area of the system is not keeping up with the other areas. and updated with an administrator-specified frequency. If this is the case. if your Reader stations are not evaluating images fast enough to meet the correction demands of your Verifier operators. and then go to increasingly more specific levels. 1. then your operators wait for images to correct. Because of the large volume of forms that run through TeleForm each day. The easiest and most accurate way to do this is to view statistics that are collected from this process. Both the period and the frequency of the statistics collection is set up in the Data tab of the Control Center Properties dialog box (see “Workflow Analysis” on page 231). then you can purchase additional Reader licenses to meet the demand of your Verifier operators. For example. They are based upon statistical information gathered during an administrator-specified period. attempting to find the cause of a bottleneck is sometimes more complex than this. General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput When you examine TeleForm throughput. most of the form images require little if any correction.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput  Form Correction Summary Report  Form Detail Report  Reader Usage Chart Overview of Throughput Analysis When you are processing a large number of forms per day. In this case. The Workflow tab is shown in the display pane. you want to maximize TeleForm’s processing efficiency. Therefore the Verifier operators have fewer images to correct than Reader stations have to evaluate. • • 296 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . However. sometimes there are bottlenecks. the condition in the previous paragraph (not enough evaluated images for Verifier operator throughput) can be caused by a high degree of success in recognizing the fields on a form. Click on the System folder of the TeleForm Control Center tree. you usually want to start at a general (global) level. Throughput Statistics Throughput statistics are online statistics that are generated in real-time.  If the backlogged images in Reader seems too high. When the source of the bottleneck has been identified. view the Readers sub-folder. this is the first thing you should analyze.  Check the Current Workload folder to see if the problem is specific to a particular batch. determine what part of the TeleForm process that statistic relates to:  If the average evaluation time seems long. you can take the appropriate actions to optimize your system throughput. view the Verifiers sub-folder.Analyze Throughput on a Global Level 2. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 297 • • • . If you see a statistic that indicates a bottleneck in the TeleForm system. If you want to find out how efficient your TeleForm system is. view the By Form tab of the Readers sub-folder. Click the appropriate sub-folder from step 2 and examine the relevant statistics.  If there are too many NonForms.  If the average time needed to correct an image seems too long. 3. Analyze Throughput on a Global Level System statistics are those statistics that apply to every part of the TeleForm system. view the Readers sub-folder. 4. License Displays the total number of licenses for each TeleForm application and the number of licenses currently in use. Workflow Displays the global statistics of your TeleForm system. the system statistics are displayed in the display pane. • • 298 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput When you click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree. the Workflow tab is shown. There are two tabs in this pane: Workflow and License. View Your Global Statistics When you click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree. 3.) (1. Integer Backlog Forms TeleForm Administration Guide (1... This configuration can be changed in the Statistics Collection option of the Global Settings folder.images that are scanned. Integer Number of images that were evaluated in Reader and the total number of images that were corrected in Verifier. Integer Shows the number of images that are waiting in the queue of Reader and the number of images that are waiting in the queue of Verifier. faxed or automatically retrieved from a directory into TeleForm Reader... 2.images/forms that are corrected in TeleForm Verifier.) (1. 2. 3.Analyze Throughput on a Global Level The statistics in the Workflow tab are divided into the three fundamental processes of the TeleForm system:  Receive column . Global Statistic Description Value Statistics Collection Shows whether or not statistics are being gathered for evaluation and correction.images/forms that are evaluated in TeleForm Reader.. These images have not yet passed through evaluation and correction. 2. 3.. On) Images Number of images received and evaluated by Reader.) • • • 299 • • • .  Verify column . (Off.  Evaluate column . The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Workflow tab. ) View Your License Statistics When you click the License tab in the System folder.. 3. • • 300 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Time (Sec. 2..) (1.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput Global Statistic Description Value Number of images that were evaluated in Reader as NonForms. 2. 0-100% (Percent) % Complete Percentage of received images that were evaluated by Reader and evaluated images that were corrected by Verifier operators.. This estimate is based on the combined throughput of all currently running TeleForm workstations.) (1. 0-100% (Percent) Time to Complete Approximate minutes required to evaluate the backlog of images in Reader and the approximate number of minutes required to correct the backlog of images in TeleForm Reader and TeleForm Verifier.. 2.. Integer % Need Verify Percentage of evaluated images that need to be corrected in Verifier. Integer Estimated Completion Shows the estimated completion time for evaluation of received images in TeleForm Reader and correction of those images in TeleForm Verifier. Time Format HH:MM AM/ PM NonForms Avg. 3. it is shown in the display pane.. 3.) (1. Time in minutes Stations Running Number of workstations running for each TeleForm application. Integer Average time it takes to evaluate and correct an image. View Your Reader Station Statistics To access the Reader station statistics.number of licenses currently used by the active TeleForm workstations Analyze Throughput on an Application Level Application statistics apply to specific applications within TeleForm. you may need to add one or more licenses for a particular application. you might need to focus on a single TeleForm application in order to more accurately diagnose a bottleneck in the TeleForm system.Analyze Throughput on an Application Level If you are reaching the limit of your TeleForm license capacity. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 301 • • • . The Reader station statistics are displayed for each workstation that is using one or more Reader licenses. Another possible solution would be to make Character Mode more selective of the characters that it displays (have more characters automatically bypass Character Mode). look at the Verifiers sub-folder of the System folder. After you view the global system statistics. After looking at the Verifiers sub-folder.total number of licenses for each of the TeleForm applications  In Use column . For example. click the Readers sub-folder of the System folder. you may see that it is taking a long time for the Verifier operators to get through Character Mode. One solution to this problem would be to turn off Character Mode. If you want to see more specific statistics on Verifier performance. The statistics in the License tab are divided into the two categories:  Licenses column . if the Backlog statistic in the Verify column of the Workflow tab is high. then your Verifier operators are not correcting the images fast enough to keep up with the evaluation in TeleForm Reader. you are looking for possible problems in the identification and evaluation of your form images. then that Reader station may have a slower CPU. Stat Description Value Station Shows the name of the TeleForm Reader workstation. String of text Images Shows the number of images that have been evaluated by this workstation. The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the By Station tab of the Readers sub-folder. Time Shows the average time required to evaluate an image on this workstation. For example. or it may be running other tasks while it is evaluating images. • • 302 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput When you view the Reader station statistics. you must select the Collect Reader image recognition statistics check box in the Statistics Collection global setting. Integer Avg. Each row in this tab corresponds to a TeleForm Reader workstation in your TeleForm system. this shows up in the NonForm column of the By Station tab for any or all of your Reader stations. IMPORTANT If you want TeleForm to collect evaluation statistics. Time in seconds NOTE If this number is higher for one Reader station than it is for all others. Refer to “Workflow Analysis” on page 231 for more information on setting up statistics collection in Control Center. if there is an abnormally high number of images being evaluated as NonForms. View Verifier Statistics To access the Verifier operator statistics. Percent NonForm Shows the number of images evaluated by this workstation as NonForms. click the User Statistics option in the Verifiers sub-folder. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 303 • • • . Displaying statistics for each correction mode helps you find which modes your operators excel in and which modes your operators need more practice and/or training in.Analyze Throughput on an Application Level Stat Description Value Need Review Shows the percentage of images evaluated by this workstation that need to be corrected in TeleForm Verifier. Each row in this tab corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system. Interpreting Inactive Idle NOTE If you are running more than one Reader on a single workstation. The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Mode Totals tab of the User Statistics option. Integer Status Shows the status of each Reader station. The Verifier operator statistics can be displayed for each correction mode of TeleForm Verifier. it is shown in the display pane. Mode Totals When you click the Mode Totals tab in the User Statistics sub-folder. the statistics of each of these Readers is combined and displayed in the workstation’s row. Each row in this tab corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system. 3. 2.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput STAT Description Value User Name of the operator. 2.. the Form Mode tab is shown in the display pane. 3.... Integer Chars (Char Mode) Shows the number of characters that this Verifier operator corrected in Character Mode. The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Form Mode tab of the User Statistics option. 2. Integer Zones (Capture Mode) Shows the number of Capture Zones that this Verifier operator corrected in Capture Mode. Only available if you have security features enabled.) (1. Integer Shows the number of fields that this Verifier operator corrected in Field Mode. String of text Forms (Form Mode) Shows the number of forms that this Verifier operator corrected in form mode. 3.) Form Mode When you click the User Statistics sub-folder. 3..) (1.) (1.. • • 304 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2.. Integer Fields (Field Mode) (1.. ) Forms / hr. Shows the average number of forms per hour that completed verification as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator . Integer (1.) Field Mode When you click the Field Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder. String of text Total Time Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier operator has been correcting forms in TeleForm Verifier. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode Time Shows the amount of time that this Verifier operator has been in Form Mode Correction. Integer (1. This name is available only if you have security features enabled. it is shown in the display pane... Integer (1. 3.. and you type a name in the Display Name box on the Add New Operator dialog box. 2.. Percent Forms (Form Mode) Shows the number of forms that completed verification in Form Mode Correction as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator. 3. 3.Analyze Throughput on an Application Level STAT Description Value User Shows the name of the Verifier operator.. 2. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 305 • • • .) Forms (Other Modes) Shows the number of forms that completed verification in correction modes other than Form Mode Correction. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode % Shows the percent of the Total Time that this Verifier operator has been in Form Mode Correction.. as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator. 2. ) (1. String of text Total Time Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier operator has been correcting forms in TeleForm Verifier. 3. This name is available only if you have security features enabled. Percent Fields (Field Mode) Shows the number of fields that completed verification in Field Mode Correction as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator. Integer Fields / hr. Integer Fields (Other Modes) Shows the number of fields that completed verification in correction modes other than Field Mode Correction. 3. Each row in this tab corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system... 2.. 3..) Capture Mode When you click the Capture Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder. • • 306 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode Time Shows the amount of time that this Verifier operator has been in Field Mode Correction. it is shown in the display pane. Field Mode Operator Statistic Description Value User Shows the name of the Verifier operator..Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Field Mode tab of the User Statistics option.) (1. Shows the average number of fields per hour that completed verification as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator .. 2. 2. and you type a name in the Display Name box on the Add New Operator dialog box. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode % Shows the percent of the Total Time that this Verifier operator has been in Field Mode Correction. Integer (1. it is shown in the display pane.. and you type a name in the Display Name box on the Add New Operator dialog box. Integer Zones (Other Modes) Shows the number of Capture Zones that completed verification in correction modes other than Capture Mode Correction. Integer Zones / hr. as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator.Analyze Throughput on an Application Level The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Capture Mode tab of the User Statistics option...) Character Mode When you click the Character Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder.) (1. 3.. Shows the average number of Capture Zones per hour that completed verification as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator. 2. 3. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 307 • • • .. Capture Mode Statistic Description Value User Shows the name of the Verifier operator. 3. String of text Total Time Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier operator has been correcting forms in TeleForm Verifier. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode % Shows the percent of the Total Time that this Verifier operator has been in Capture Mode Correction.. Percent Zones (Capture Mode) Shows the number of Capture Zones that completed verification in Capture Mode Correction as a result of corrections made by this Verifier operator.) (1. 2. This name is available only if you have security features enabled. Integer (1. 2. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode Time Shows the amount of time that this Verifier operator has been in Capture Mode Correction. Each row in this tab corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode Time Shows the amount of time that this Verifier operator has been in Character Mode Correction. Time Format (H:MM:SS) Mode % Shows the percent of the Total Time that this Verifier operator has been in Character Mode Correction.) Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level Current workload statistics apply to batches of forms that are currently being processed in TeleForm. String of text Total Time Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier operator has been correcting forms in TeleForm Verifier. 3. 3... Character Mode Operator Statistic Description Value User Shows the name of the Verifier operator.) (1.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Char Mode tab of the User Statistics option. and you type a name in the Display Name box on the Add New Operator dialog box... Percent Chars (Char Mode) Shows the number of characters that this Verifier operator corrected in Character Mode Correction..) (1. • • 308 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . and you want to check the status of your form processing job. Integer (1. Each row in this tab corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system. 2. 3. Integer Chars / hr. Shows the average number of characters corrected by this Verifier operator per hour. View these statistics if you are currently processing one or more batches. 2. This name is available only if you have security features enabled.. Integer Chars (Other Modes) Shows the number of characters that this Verifier operator corrected in modes other than Character Mode Correction. 2. the statistics for this batch are shown in the display pane. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 309 • • • . There are two display options:  Table  Chart Table Displays the current workload statistics for each batch that is still being processed.Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level Available Workload Statistics When you click the Current Workload folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree. in a table format. in a chart format When you click the sub-folder of an individual batch (under the Current Workload folder). These statistics include detailed information about the batch. the current workload statistics are shown in the display pane. Chart Displays the current workload statistics for each batch. This view is displayed when you select the Current Workload tab. 3. 8-digit number Scan Shows the number of images that were scanned for this batch. Stat • • 310 •• • • Description Value Batch Shows the batch ID of this batch.. 3... Integer (1. The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Batches tab of the Current Workload folder. 2. Integer (1.) TeleForm Administration Guide . Integer (1. Any form images that are not part of a normal batch are counted in the Non-Batch row (this includes form images that are received from a faxing device and those that are retrieved from a directory). 3.. 2..) NonForm Shows the number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms.. the Batches tab is shown in the display pane. 3..) Eval Shows the number of images in this batch that were evaluated in TeleForm Reader. 2. 2. Integer (1.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput View Batch Statistics When you click the Current Workload folder. Eval OK Shows the number of images in this batch that have completed processing. Each row in this tab corresponds to a batch in your TeleForm system that has not completed processing.) Need Review Shows number of images in this batch that still need to be reviewed in TeleForm Verifier. 2.... Integer (1. 3. Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level Stat Description Value Priority Shows the priority of this batch. Alphanumeric (19 characters) Owner Shows the owner of this batch. The batch images are divided into 6 categories (one color for each category). This number can be changed in the Priority box on the Batch Properties dialog box of your batch. String of text View Batch Chart When you click the By Batch tab of the Current Workload folder. a chart is shown. The following list shows what each category represents:  NonForm. The Batch Workflow chart gives you a visual representation of the overall status of your batch. The tracking ID is used to identify and track a batch of form images. String of text Tracking ID Shows the tracking ID of this batch. Number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms (teal bar)  Eval OK. It is specified in the Batch Setup dialog box of TeleForm Reader. String of text Job Shows the job name. Number of images in this batch that have completed processing (green bar) TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 311 • • • . Integer Range (0-255) (Default = 100) Status Shows the status of this batch. Job Shows the name of the job for this batch. Number of images in this batch that TeleForm failed to process (red bar) View Statistics for an Individual Batch When you expand the Current Workload folder. • • 312 •• • • Statistic Description Batch # Shows the batch ID of this batch. Workstation Name of the Scanner workstation that scanned this batch. Indicates that all images in the batch have been processed and that the batch has been committed (the whole batch is displayed in gray)  Bad Images. When you click the sub-folder of a batch. Committed Shows whether or not this batch has been committed in Verifier. Status Shows the status of this batch. Number of images in this batch that still need to be corrected in TeleForm Verifier (blue bar)  Need Eval. Data Review Indicates whether Data Review mode is on or off. Scan Time Shows the date that this batch was scanned into TeleForm Scan Station. Type Action that Reader takes when there are missing pages in this batch. Attachment Option Specifies how NonForms are handled for this batch. a sub-folder is shown for each batch that is currently being processed. Number of images in this batch that still need to be evaluated in TeleForm Reader (yellow bar)  Committed.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput  Need Review. Tracking ID Shows the batch tracking ID specified in Scan Station. the Info tab is shown in the display pane. TeleForm Administration Guide . Scan Operator Shows the name of the Scanner station operator who scanned this batch. Batch Date Shows a date associated with this batch. The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic in the Info tab of the your batch sub-folder. Job QC Indicates whether Job QC mode is on or off. Owner Shows the owner of this batch. Forms Evaluated OK Number of forms in this batch that have completed processing. Comment Shows any comments that relate to this batch. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 313 • • • . the TeleForm Report options is shown in the display pane. Pages Evaluated OK Number of images in this batch that have completed processing Need Review Number of images in this batch that still need to be reviewed in Verifier. Forms Scanned Number of forms that were scanned for this batch. When you click on the Reports folder. Priority Shows the priority of this batch.Generate System Throughput Reports Statistic Description Directory Shows the directory of scanned images for this batch. Bad Images Number of bad images in this batch. Generate System Throughput Reports The Reports folder allows you to generate reports that are based on the statistics in the System and Current Workload folders. Pages Scanned Number of pages that were scanned for this batch. NonForm Number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms. Pages Evaluated Number of pages (images) in this batch that were evaluated in Reader. Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput These reports can also be generated in the TeleForm Stats utility. Double-click the report that you want to generate. TeleForm Administration Guide . On the TeleForm Control Center tree.  Form Detail. Analyzes the efficiency of your TeleForm system.  Form Correction Summary. Under Constraints. Your Report is displayed in the System Performance dialog box. Identifies the skill level of your Verifier operators. select the start and end date. 3. click Reports. The TeleForm Report options opens in the display pane. To generate a report in TeleForm Control Center 1. 4. 2. 5. and the start and end time for this report. Shows the time needed to evaluate forms. Click OK.  Form Evaluation Summary. The Report Settings dialog box for that report opens. Available Reports TeleForm Stats can generate the following reports: • • 314 •• • •  System Performance. User and Workstation that you want this report to be generated for. This report points to inefficiencies in form design. Under Period of report. select the name of the Form. Available Reports  User Performance. Examines the efficiency of your Verifier operators.  Batch Summary. View these statistics if you are currently processing one or more batches, and you want to check the status of your form processing job.  Reader Usage Chart. This chart helps you analyze the volume of form processing over time.  Verifier Productivity Charts. This chart helps you analyze the amount of work that each Verifier operator has done. Crystal Reports Controls Various buttons on the Crystal Reports button bar control what you can do with your report.  End Page. Click this button to go to the last page of the report.  Page Down. Click this button to go one page towards the end of the report  Page Forward. Click this button to go one page towards the beginning of the report  Beginning Page. Click this button to go to the first page of the report.  Home. Click this button to go to the home page of the report. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 315 • • • Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput  Print. Click this button to print your report.  Export. Click this button to export your report to a database  Zoom. Select the level of magnification to view your form at. Choose a value from 25 to 400 percent, or Page Width or Whole Page. System Performance Report This report provides an overall summary of TeleForm processing efficiency. This report helps you identify overall changes in the system throughput for a user-specified interval of time. For example, if a scanner started producing bad scans, this would be reflected in the Average Fields to Verify column of this report. The following table describes each statistic in the System Performance report: • • 316 •• • • Stat Description Example Form Name Name of form. Mike’s Form Pages Evaluated Total number of images that have been evaluated for this form. 5,400 Average Eval. Time (sec.) Average time (in seconds) required to evaluate a single image of this form. 4.2 seconds Pages Needed Vfy. Total number of evaluated images that needed review for this form. 3,270 TeleForm Administration Guide System Performance Report Stat Description Example Forms Verified Total number of images corrected for this form. 2,876 Avg. Verify Time (sec.) Average time (in seconds) required to correct a single image of this form. 18.9 seconds Avg. Fields To Verify Average number of fields that needed correction per form. 2.4 Total Form Pages Evaluated Total number of images that were evaluated for all processed forms. 11,038 Total Form Pages Verify Total number of evaluated images that needed review for all processed forms. 6,237 Verification Backlog Growth Shows the maximum amount of images that were in the correction queue. 6,237 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 317 • • • Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput User Performance Report The following graphic displays a typical User Performance Report: The User Performance report shows you how much work each Verifier operator has performed, and divides this work into the following categories:  Character Mode correction  Field Mode correction  Form Mode correction  Capture Mode correction.  Combined work for all modes of correction This report helps you determine which Verifier operators need more training and/ or instruction, and which Verifier operators are correcting forms efficiently. • • 318 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide User Performance Report IMPORTANT Verifier operators must log in if you want to run reports that show individual performance statistics. If the operators do not log in (or if the Security feature itself is not enabled), the reports do not track individual users. User Performance Chart Statistics The following table describes each statistic in the User Performance report: User Performance Statistic Description Sample Value CHARACTER MODE STATISTICS Time in Char Mode Shows the amount of time that this operator spent in Character Mode correction. Time format (HH:MM:SS) (0:13:10) Chars Corrected Shows the number of characters corrected by this operator in Character Mode correction. 205 Char Visits Shows the number of characters that were visited by this operator in Character Mode correction. This includes characters that were held for Field Mode correction. 555 Correction Shows the percentage of characters in the Char Visits column that were corrected by this operator in Character Mode correction. 37% Chars/Hr. Character corrected per hour in all correction modes. For example, 205 characters corrected in a time of 1:35:12 yields a Chars/Hr. value of 129. 129 Chars/Mode Hr. Number of characters per hour that were corrected during Character Mode correction. 933 Shows the amount of time that this operator spent in Field Mode correction. Time format (HH:MM:SS) FIELD MODE STATISTICS Time in Field Mode TeleForm Administration Guide (0:44:55) • • • 319 • • • Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput User Performance Statistic Description Sample Value Fields Corrected Shows the number of fields corrected by this operator in Field Mode correction. 220 Field Visits Shows the number of fields that were visited by this operator in Field Mode correction. This includes fields that were held for Form Mode correction. 296 Correction Shows the percentage of fields in the Field Visits column that were corrected by this operator in Field Mode correction. 74% Fields/Hr. The average number of fields per hour that were corrected by this operator in all correction modes. 107 Fields/Mode Hr. Shows the average number of fields per hour that were corrected in Field Mode correction. 458 Shows the amount of time that this operator spent in Form Mode correction. Time format (HH:MM:SS) Forms Corrected Shows the number of forms corrected by this operator in Form Mode correction. 33 Forms/Hr. Shows the average number of forms per hour that were corrected by this operator. 21 Forms/Mode Hr. Shows the average number of forms per hour that were corrected in Form Mode correction. 53 FORM MODE STATISTICS Time in Form Mode (0:13:10) CAPTURE MODE STATISTICS • • 320 •• • • Time in Capture Mode Shows the amount of time that this operator spent in Capture Mode. Zones Corrected Shows the number of Capture Zones corrected by this operator in Capture Mode. Time format (HH:MM:SS) TeleForm Administration Guide Verifier Productivity Charts User Performance Statistic Description Fields Completed Shows the number of fields inside the Capture Zones that were completed by this operator in Capture Mode. Chars Keyed Shows the number of characters that were keyed into the Capture fields by this operator in Capture Mode. Chars/Hr. Shows the average number of characters per hour that were keyed by this operator in Capture Mode. Chars/Mode Hr. Shows the average number of characters per hour that were keyed in Capture Mode. Sample Value TOTALS - operator Time Shows the total time that this operator spent correcting forms in TeleForm Verifier 1:35:12 Chars Corrected All Modes Shows the total number of characters that this operator corrected in all modes of correction combined. 549 Char Visits All Modes Shows the total number of characters that this operator visited in all modes of correction combined. 925 Form Punts Shows the total number of forms that this operator transferred to another operator (including the Supervisor) 0 Verifier Productivity Charts The following graphic displays a typical Verifier Productivity Chart. The charts include a bar chart and pie chart (discussed in the next two sections). With these charts, you can determine which operators are processing forms efficiently, and which operators need more training and/or instruction. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 321 • • • IMPORTANT Verifier operators must log in if you want to run reports that show individual performance statistics. the reports do not track individual users. If the operators do not log in (or if the Security feature itself is not enabled).Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput The Verifier Productivity charts do not take into account the number of hours that each Verifier operator worked during the specified time interval. Verifier Productivity Bar Chart The Verifier Productivity bar chart has the following characteristics:  • • 322 •• • • Forms Completed on the vertical (y) axis . Keep this in mind when viewing the charts.shows the number of forms that have completed correction TeleForm Administration Guide . Batch Summary Report The Batch Summary report provides a summary of each batch processed during the specified time interval.  The whole pie is equal to 100% of the corrected forms for the specified time interval. However. With this report. how long it took to commit each batch. Time format INDIVIDUAL BATCHES (HH:MM:SS)A/P 09:23:12A TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 323 • • • . However.Batch Summary Report  Verifier operator name . This color-coded bar represents the number of forms that the Verifier operator corrected during the specified time interval. a rectangular bar is placed on this chart. The following table describes each statistic in the Batch Summary report: Statistic Description Sample Value Batch ID Shows the relevant digits of the batch ID for this batch.shows the name of the Verifier operator. as specified in the TeleForm Security The Verifier Productivity bar chart is a visual representation of the amount of work that each Verifier operator has done. The Batch Summary report is primarily used to track the batches that were scanned in today. 1 Start Time Shows the time that this batch entered the TeleForm system. you can more easily see the relative contributions of each Verifier operator to the total verification job. Verifier Productivity Pie Chart The Verifier Productivity pie chart has the following characteristics:  Each slice of the pie chart represents the percentage of forms completed by a Verifier operator. you probably only want to generate this report for one day. and the number of images in each batch that currently need review (if the batch has not been committed). Therefore. with the pie chart. For each Verifier operator. it can also be used to determine how efficiently each batch was processed in previous form processing jobs. The Verifier Productivity pie chart represents the same data as the Verifier Productivity bar chart. you can view the size of each batch. 50 Images Shows the total number of images that were scanned (for all batches). Time format Images Shows the number of images in this batch that were scanned. 237 Nonforms Shows the number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms. 1078 (HH:MM:SS) 0:53:42 TOTAL Form Evaluation Summary Report The following figure displays a typical Form Evaluation Summary report: • • 324 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Time format (HH:MM:SS)A/P 10:15:54A Duration Shows the total time required to process this batch. 237 Forms Shows the number of forms in this batch that were evaluated. This time is the difference between the Commit Time and the Start Time. 3772 Nonforms Shows the total number of forms that were evaluated as NonForms (for all batches). 0 Need Review Shows the number of images that currently need review in TeleForm Verifier.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput Statistic Description Sample Value Commit Time Shows the time that this batch was committed in TeleForm Verifier. 10 Need Review Shows the total number of images that currently need review in TeleForm Verifier. 3782 Forms Shows the total number of forms that were evaluated (for all batches). and with the combined totals and averages of every form. The following table describes each column in the Form Evaluation Summary report: Form Evaluation Statistic Description Sample Value NONFORMS For the NonForms columns.Form Evaluation Summary Report The Form Evaluation Summary shows you the maximum. This report is useful if you want to know how efficient it is to evaluate a particular form.) Shows the average time (in seconds) required to evaluate a single page of this form. and the average number of fields on your form that needed review for the specified time interval.3 seconds TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 325 • • • . 4. 500 Avg. see the Forms columns (they are the same) FORMS Pages Read Shows the number of images (form pages) that were evaluated for this form. You can also compare one form with all of the other forms that you are processing. Eval Time (sec. minimum and average time it took to evaluate your form. ) Shows the average time (in seconds) required to evaluate a single form image.3 seconds Avg.8 seconds Long Eval Time (sec.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput Form Evaluation Statistic Sample Value Description Short Eval Time (sec.2 Always Review Fields per Page Shows the average number of fields per form page with the Always Review configuration.0 Pages Read Shows the combined number of images (form pages) that were evaluated for all of your forms. for this form. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined.4 seconds Avg.2 Always Review Fields per Page Shows the average number of fields per form page with the Always Review configuration. 3. Eval Time (sec. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined. This average is based on the evaluation of all of your forms combined. 4.) Shows the minimum time (in seconds) it took to evaluate a single page of this form. 2. 1. 3. Fields to Review Shows the average number of fields that needed review per form image. Fields to Review Shows the average number of fields that needed review for this form/form page. 2. 500 Avg. 10.0 TOTAL Form Correction Summary Report The following figure displays a typical Form Correction Summary report: • • 326 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .) Shows the maximum time (in seconds) it took to evaluate a single page of this form. and the average number of characters on your form that needed review for the specified time interval. With this report. This counts the form pages that were evaluated OK by TeleForm Reader 0. 0. you can compare your forms to determine which ones are being corrected efficiently and which ones need to be optimized. as specified in the Save As dialog box of TeleForm Designer.Form Correction Summary Report The Form Correction Summary shows you the maximum. 150 seconds Average Char Visit Shows the average number of characters per form page that needed review.9 seconds Short Time Shows the minimum time required to correct this form page. The following table describes each column in the Form Correction Summary report: Form Correction Statistic Description Sample Value Form Name Shows the name of this form. Dave’s Form Form Count Shows the total number of forms processed. minimum and average time it took to correct your form.03 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 327 • • • . 8. 18.1 seconds Long Time Shows the maximum time required to correct this form page.995 Average Time Shows the average time (in seconds) required to correct this form page. 32 Form Punts Shows the total number of form pages that this operator transferred to another operator (including the Supervisor). This does not count the form pages that were evaluated OK by TeleForm Reader. This report can be used to analyze the evaluation and correction process on a field level.Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput Form Correction Statistic Sample Value Description Average Char Correct Shows the average number of characters per form page that were corrected. 0 Form Detail Report The following figure displays a typical Form Detail report: The Form Detail report displays statistics for individual fields on the specified form. • • 328 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . instead of the form level (which is the lowest level you can view in your online statistics).21 Average Field Visit Shows the average number of fields that were visited on this form page 2. 5. for the specified time interval. a data point is placed on this chart.shows each day in the month This chart is a visual representation of the volume of form processing over time. this report points you to the inefficiencies in your form design.Reader Usage Chart More than any other Form report. if you notice that a street address image zone needs review much more often than the other fields on your form. Reader Usage Chart The following graphic displays a typical Reader Usage chart: The Reader Usage chart is a line chart with the following characteristics:  Images on the vertical (y) axis . For each day that you process forms. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 329 • • • . the number of images evaluated is displayed in a table at the bottom of the Reader Usage chart. you might consider using a street address constrained print field instead. The data point represents the number of form images evaluated on that day.shows the total number of images that were evaluated by all Reader stations combined  Day of Month on the horizontal (x) axis . For example. For each day in the specified time interval that you process forms. Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput • • 330 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Explains the settings that support TeleForm’s high availability and redundancy features.  “Redundancy and High Availability Settings” on page 333.PART 4 TeleForm Enterprise This section provides information specific to TeleForm Enterprise. . Explains how TeleForm can contribute to maintaining regulatory audit trails.  “Regulatory Compliance” on page 343. Part 4 TeleForm Enterprise • • 332 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . The availability of a multi-user. Redundancy and High Availability Settings CHAPTER 18 A goal common to all IT departments is that of providing maximum availability of their systems to their users. all of which have the potential to fail.  Hardware Components  Cluster Server Monitoring  Redundant License Service TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 333 • • • . all of these factors must be examined and addressed in the appropriate order based on a cost/benefit analysis for each component. This chapter describes the TeleForm Enterprise options and settings that support redundancy and high availability. network-based application is influenced by many factors that include multiple hardware and software components. In the pursuit of high availability. network cables and other equipment essential for internal network communications. switches. Fire Electrical equipment can potentially catch fire and ignite other equipment. Buildings Natural and unnatural disasters such as earthquakes. Use of redundant and non-destructive cooling systems. Cooling Water pipes A/C system can break. Setup redundant systems. examples of how they might fail. Use of non-destructive fire suppression technologies.Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings Hardware Components Table 1 on page 334. resulting in complete or partial failure of server room equipment. NOTE These lists are not meant to be comprehensive and are simply intended to give the reader an introduction to the types of things that must be addressed when building a high availability system. Table 2 on page 335. hurricanes or terrorist attacks have the potential to disable entire buildings or cities. TeleForm Administration Guide . and some common responses to minimize the risks associated with failure of the component. External Network Failure of internal or external equipment required to provide access between the internal network and external networks such as remote offices or the Internet. Internal Network Failure of routers. and Table 3 on page 336 list some key hardware components. Table 1 Infrastructure Risk Areas • • 334 •• • • Risk Area Potential Failures Possible Responses Power Failure of externally-supplied power from utility companies The use of internal power generators for primary or backup power. Complete or partial duplication of mission critical operations at a secondary location. Concurrent use of multiple vendors and different technologies to provide connectivity between internal and external networks. NIC. has the potential to fail. • • • 335 • • • .. the application vendor must build-in features specifically designed to address high availability concerns. Use “clustered” servers so that if one server fails another server is able to take is place.Hardware Components Table 2 Server Risk Areas Risk Area Potential Failures Possible Responses Database Server The database server application may stop working due to software bugs in the database application. File Server Storage One or more hard drives in the file server may crash. Use of RAID-based file servers and/or clustered file servers Server Hardware Any hardware component in a server computer. RAM. etc. such as CPU. Generally speaking. allowing them to continue operating even if one component fails. motherboard. Some network-based applications have additional hardware or software server-based components that are potential points of failure. Use of “clustered” servers so that if the primary server fails the backup server can take over. Server-Based Application Services TeleForm Administration Guide High-end servers also include redundancy for many key components. as described on “Cluster Server for File Servers” on page 338. Therefore.  Any file server which TeleForm accesses through a file share. Examples include high-performance scanners. workstations can suffer from hardware failures. In many cases. Although action can be taken to increase reliability in each risk area. duplicate workstations should be available. the goal is to find the right balance between costs. Failover Process It is important to realize that the failover process. • • 336 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . and availability. Typically. meaning the process of the clustered servers switching from the primary to the backup server. such as an active connection to the database. Typically. This includes the TeleForm File Server itself (the server to which TeleForm is actually installed) and certain other types of servers. Workstation Software The workstation OS or a workstation-based application has the potential to stop working due to problems within the application or due to a other applications running on the same computer. It is also not transparent to the client applications because some in-process information. redundancy is accomplished by obtaining duplicate hardware for any workstation components that are unique to a particular task. there are multiple workstations that are interchangeable. Cluster Server Monitoring TeleForm Enterprise can monitor two types of cluster servers:  The cluster server that is hosting the MS SQL database used by TeleForm. there is always the chance of downtime if a failure occurs. is not instantaneous and may actually take several seconds or even longer. may become invalid during the failover. Additional Hardware Some applications require specific hardware to be used and the workstations.Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings Table 3 Workstation Risk Areas Risk Area Potential Failures Possible Responses Workstation Hardware Similar to Server hardware. If there are special-purpose workstations that are unique. data security. redundancy is accomplished by obtaining duplicate hardware for any workstation components that are unique to a particular task. When TeleForm receives this message it immediately stops what it is doing and waits for another notification message that the backup server is on-line. if the primary SQL Server fails. If a SQL-related error occurs TeleForm attempts to recover by re-attempting the operation and in some cases re-initializing the SQL connection. However. Failure Notification for Cluster Servers Once TeleForm has been configured to monitor a cluster server (“Enable Server Cluster Support” on page 339). it automatically notifies module operators and TeleForm system managers when a cluster server is switching from one active node to another: 1. 3. When this second message is received. The Resource Checker serves to notify TeleForm operators that processing has been paused because the cluster has switched to a backup node. The Resource Checker is automatically closed when the failure has been addressed and the server is online. TeleForm runs normally. TeleForm attempts to resume processing from where it stopped. 2. If the cluster server notifies TeleForm that a failure event has occurred.Cluster Server Monitoring As long as the primary SQL Server is running. TeleForm receives a message from the backup server as soon as the failure is detected by the clustered server environment. the Resource Checker is automatically displayed at all affected TeleForm modules. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 337 • • • . Cluster Server for File Servers In addition to monitoring a clustered MS SQL server. you are prompted to identify the MS SQL server to use for TeleForm data storage. When installing TeleForm. not any individual servers within the cluster. Specify the cluster name. 2. Examples of such servers include:  • • 338 •• • • Servers hosting database lookups for data entry field validation (all databases except SQL) TeleForm Administration Guide . No special steps are required. Clustered MS SQL Server ` Primary TeleForm Workstation ` Secondary TeleForm Workstation ` TeleForm File Server TeleForm Workstation To install MS SQL to a cluster server 1. TeleForm Enterprise can monitor clustered file servers that TeleForm accesses through file shares. See “MS SQL Database” on page 46 for information on setting up MS SQL before installing TeleForm. and you have enabled MS SQL cluster support. a failure event pauses TeleForm processing. Install MS SQL database on the cluster server using a standard installation.Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings Cluster Server for MS SQL If your TeleForm Enterprise MS SQL database is running on a cluster server. See Step 13 on page 56 for information on specifying the MS SQL server during the installation of TeleForm. Processing is resumed after one of the other servers in the cluster has taken over the active server role. Unless TeleForm accesses a file share on the cluster server. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 339 • • • . and other databases to which TeleForm can export data (but not images) may be hosted on cluster servers. do not attempt to monitor it through TeleForm. could “target” a file share on a clustered server. the Connect Agent to Livelink may export data to a clustered Livelink server. Start a TeleForm module. XLS. fall into this category. but it does not do so through a file share. Enable Server Cluster Support To enable server cluster support in TeleForm 1. Clustered MS SQL Server Primary ` TeleForm Workstation Secondary ` Clustered File Server TeleForm Workstation ` Primary TeleForm Workstation Secondary TeleForm may not be able to monitor ALL cluster servers with which it interacts. For example.Cluster Server Monitoring  Servers that host simple databases to which TeleForm exports data. which exports data as CSV and images. Access. CSV. Most export Connect Agents. with the exception of the Connect Agent for Capture to Directory.  Cluster servers to which TeleForm exports through the Connect Agent for Capture to Directory. TeleForm Enterprise can monitor these cluster servers for failure. a. Select the Enable checkbox in the SQL Cluster Support section. 3. 4. 6. d. To monitor clustered file servers: a. Select the Enable checkbox in the File Server Cluster Support section. Open the Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support tab. • • 340 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 5. An editable field opens in the File servers to monitor window c. From the Utilities menu. b. The Resource name field is automatically filled in and cannot be edited. The Global and Local TeleForm Settings dialog box opens. Click the Add button. Type the name of the clustered file server in the editable field and press the ENTER key. Click Apply and OK.Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings 2. select Configuration. Repeat as needed for more file servers. Transfer the License Service to a Different Machine If the machine that the TeleForm License Service is installed on crashes and cannot be recovered. See “License Monitoring” on page 223 for more information about the License Service. 2. See “Autonomy Customer Support” on page 27 for information on contacting Technical Support. Install TeleForm on another server in the cluster. all licensed TeleForm modules shut down. The changes to the TeleForm License Service for TeleForm Enterprise are automatic. Right-click the TeleForm License Service and select Start. After that point. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 341 • • • . 3. IMPORTANT If the License Service is not restarted within two weeks. On the Services window. You do not need to enable any options or change any settings for the two-week “grace period” to take effect. for system managers to address the situation. find the TeleForm License Service. You can also configure TeleForm Control Center to generate an alert when the License Service is not running. the TeleForm system manager needs to contact Autonomy Cardiff Technical Support for assistance in restarting TeleForm. See “Alerts in Control Center” on page 236 for information on configuring alerts. Open Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services on your TeleForm File Server. you must: 1. Warning Messages and Alerts If you want Control Center to generate alerts regarding the License Service. The time period between the License Service going offline and TeleForm modules automatically shutting down is two weeks.Redundant License Service Redundant License Service The License Service prevents a system interruption when the TeleForm File Server experiences a temporary failure. you must enable that option. Restart the License Service To restart the TeleForm License Service 1. • • 342 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . See “Activation” on page 59 for more information on activating TeleForm. Install the local files to the same device (shared) the previous server used.Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings 2. Reactivate TeleForm through the Activation Wizard. 3. 4. Start the License Service on the new server.  Double Key Data Entry  Compliance Security  Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 343 • • • .  New reporting tool to query the audit data collected. Regulatory Compliance CHAPTER 19 Compliance tools in TeleForm Enterprise assist in efforts to respond to numerous regulatory requirements such as Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOA). and Title 21 CFR Part 11 (Part 11). Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA).  LDAP Support. This chapter describes regulatory compliance tools in TeleForm.  Enhanced security communication with Microsoft 2003 and 2008 Server.  Expanded data tracking and system use logging. The overall guiding principle is to lower the overall cost of compliance. The primary goal of TeleForm Compliance tools is to provide better compliance support by either automating common manual processes and making common practices easier to perform. Compliance tools in TeleForm Enterprise include:  Double-key data entry in Verifier. Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance Double Key Data Entry Double key data entry is where 2 different users type data into a field and the data must match or it is flagged for further review. Scan Station. click Utilities > Configuration. Reader. Set up Double Key Validation for a Field.. click the Multiuser Features tab and then Compliance Support. NOTE You must have at least 2 users with Verifier (Basic) rights. Enable Double Key Validation To enable double key validation 1. Process Batches With Double Key Validation. See “Security” on page 85 for more information. or Verifier).. The Settings dialog box opens. Set up and enable Security. Designer. • • 344 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2. Enable Double Key Validation. 3. 4. To use Double Key data entry 1. In one of the core TeleForm applications (TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher. 2. In the Settings dialog box. 4. please see “Compliance Security” on page 347. Select Enable double key validation. Click OK to close the dialog box. Click Apply to apply your changes. Set up Double Key Validation for a Field To set up double key validation 1. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 345 • • • . In TeleForm Designer. right-click on the field which will require double key validation and select Properties. For information on enabling Account Impersonation. 5.Double Key Data Entry 3. Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance 2. 3. Select Double key to enable double key validation. 2. Select the Job that is used to process batches. To enable Data Review 1. • • 346 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Process Batches With Double Key Validation Double key validation requires that items be processed within a batch and that Data Review is enabled for the batch. Select the Validations tab. In Scan Station go to File > Job Configuration. 5.  It cannot be used with Single Sign On.Compliance Security 3. A drop list opens to select the level of review. Click OK. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 347 • • • . This feature cannot be used with a system installed with mapped drives.5 Compliance Security. Select the level of review the processing requires. Compliance Security Two additional levels of security have been added for TeleForm Enterprise 10.0 and later:  The directory that contains the TeleForm forms can be limited to use by a specific TeleForm Group. On the Review/Export tab. check Data Review. 4.  It is only available for TeleForm system installed with UNC. IMPORTANT The following limitations exist for TeleForm Enterprise 10.  TeleForm can use Account Impersonation for processing. • • 348 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . right-click the Forms folder and select Security Settings. The Folder Security dialog box opens. select File > Templates. See “Enterprise Security Options” on page 86 for instructions. 3. Enable security for the TeleForm System. 2. “Revision Control” on page 259 for more information. Set Up Form Folder Security To set up form folder security 1.  Ensure sufficient security is setup on the Microsoft SQL Server used with TeleForm.Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance Cardiff strongly recommends that you implement the following in support of Compliance:  Version control on all form definitions and scripts.  Do not override compliance safeguards with script. In the Templates dialog box. In TeleForm Designer. 4. The TeleForm Administrator account must be a member of the Power Users group on TeleForm Server and all workstations. Set Up Windows Security To set up Network Security for TeleForm Compliance 1. On the Domain Controller create: a. 6. Navigate to File Server Management > Shares b. c. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 349 • • • . On the Share Permissions tab. Operator accounts for each person that logs on to TeleForm. This is the account that TeleForm operates with under Account Impersonation. select Everyone and Full Control access. On the TeleForm Server: a. b. A TeleForm administrator account. These Operator/user accounts must be in the Users group on the TeleForm Server and appropriate Workstations. 7. Click OK. Select the user group that should have rights to modify forms from the Security Group drop list. Right-click on the shared TeleForm directory and select Properties. 2. This dialog box displays the name of the folder as it is displayed in TeleForm.Compliance Security 5. as well as the path. Set Account Allow Impersonation to 1. These tasks can only be accomplished while logged into the TeleForm system that has Account Impersonation enabled. On the TeleForm Server: 1. that their Windows security level would not allow them to do. Select the TeleForm Administrator and grant Full Control. • • 350 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide .. f.. g. in addition to the inherited rights from the Parent (TeleForm) directory.INI file using Notepad or a similar application. Enable Account Impersonation Account Impersonation is used to allow a TeleForm operator to complete tasks within the TeleForm application. 3.. Select the TeleForm operator accounts (do not include the TeleForm Administrator account) and select Traverse Folder/Execute File permissions and clear any other permissions.Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance d. Open the shared TeleForm directory. h. In the TeleForm root directory. 2. such as process documents or save data. in addition to the inherited rights from the Parent (TeleForm) directory. Then Save and Exit the file. select the TeleForm Administrator account and grant Full Control. select the \TeleForm Public directory. 4. On the Securities tab. Select Configuration Settings > Global Settings > Global System > Account Information tab. click Advanced. right-click on the \TeleForm Public directory and select Properties. On the Securities tab. e. you must have completed “Set Up Windows Security” on page 349. Open TeleForm Control Center. Open the TELEDATA. On the Securities tab select the TeleForm operator accounts and select Read access. To enable Account Impersonation. Type the domain the TeleForm Administrator account is a member of in Account Domain Name. Type the password for the TeleForm Administrator account in Account Password. etc.Compliance Security 5. It is recommended that form exports. 8. 9. are copied to either a local drive or elsewhere on the network. Click OK. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 351 • • • . Type the login name of the TeleForm Administrator account in Account User Name. Select Enable Account Impersonation. Account Impersonation is now enabled for all TeleForm users. 6. NOTE A side effect of account impersonation is that anything an operator user copies to a local workstation profile is only available when the TeleForm Administrator is logged into the workstation. files. 7. This is the account that all TeleForm operators impersonate while logged into TeleForm. 2. 3. The reports generated by Report Generator can be used to demonstrate that Compliance Audit Logging is taking place. Select Configuration Settings > Global Settings > Multiuser Features > Compliance Support. Click Apply to apply your changes. • • 352 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 4. To notify your users that their actions are logged 1. You have the option to inform your users of this each time they log into TeleForm. select Enable Digital Signature Warning. Digital Signature TeleForm applies user names and passwords as digital signatures on all human actions within the TeleForm system.Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging include all user actions that take place using a TeleForm System. Click OK to close the dialog box. 5. In Warning text. Open TeleForm Control Center. type the text that you want to be displayed each time a user logs in. Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging Audit Logging Level Audit logging is disabled by default. You must select a logging level to enable the tracking. CAUTION Maximum Audit Logging generates a tremendous amount of data.  Minimum Audit Logging logs module startup and shutdown  Normal Audit Logging logs all user and system actions.  Maximum Audit Logging logs all user and system actions. including modification of individual data elements/fields. We recommend at a minimum:  2 GB Server RAM  1 TB Disk Space in an external SCSI Storage Cabinet  Configured RAID Level 5 TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 353 • • • . except modification of individual data elements/fields. please ensure that your system is scaled to handle this load. Before enabling this option. The sync operation between the live TeleForm database and the off-line database should not have a noticeable performance affect. Open Report Generator at least once to create the required tables. 4. • • 354 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . 2. Select Configuration Settings > Global Settings > Multiuser Features > Compliance Support. Cardiff supports Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Data Warehousing. After the initial copy has taken place. log into TeleForm as the Administrator user. Using an off-line database removes the reporting task from the live TeleForm system which speeds the processing of operators.Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance Data Warehouse/Off-line Database TeleForm supports reporting from the live TeleForm database. using Report Generator. To set up reporting with Report Generator 1. Open TeleForm Control Center. Use the Data Transformation Services to create a DTS Package with the following tables from the TeleForm database:  Tfuser  Tfvfstat  Tfrdstat  Tfrfstat  Tfbatmt  Tfidtbl  Tfauditbatch  Tfauditform  Tfaudituser  Tfauditworkstation  TfauditImage  Tfauditlog 3. NOTE Cardiff recommends that you do not use Database Replication for data warehouse transfers. as well as an off-line (Archive) database. a.Trusted_Connection=Yes b. Point the Data warehouse connect string to the alternate database location for off-line reporting.Initial Catalog='MyDatabase'.Data Source='MyServer'. 7. Connect string syntax to specify an OLEDB (Direct Server) connection: Provider=SQLOLEDB. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 355 • • • .UID=MyUID. Click OK to close the dialog. Click Apply to apply your changes.Integrated Security='SSPI’ 6.User ID='MyID'.DSN=MyDSN.PWD=MyPassword  with SQL Integrated Security: Provider=MSDASQL.DSN=MyDSN. Connect string syntax to specify an ODBC Data Source: Provider=MSDASQL.Data Source='MyServer'.Password='MyPassword'  with SQL integrated Security: Provider=SQLOLEDB.Initial Catalog='MyDatabase'.Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging 5. Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance • • 356 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Appendixes This section includes the appendixes.  “Glossary” on page 359 . Appendixes • • 358 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . B When used for Traditional and VersiForms. AutoMerge Publisher (AMP) A TeleForm module that allows you to distribute documents via printer. Active Refers to the window. Application window The work area of a running application. Blank A field that does not contain any data. fax or email. Keystrokes and mouse clicks apply to the “active” item. When used with Existing forms. or icon that “has focus”. Append To add data to the end of an existing file. Application icon A graphic on the desktop. TeleForm attempts to match an equivalent data Entry Field to the original. banding selects all the objects in the area. Bar Code Sets of characters that are represented as a series of black bars and white spaces. Start menu. Bitmap An image made up of individual pixels. that represents an application. etc..Glossary A Activate Moving a form from the design stage to the production stage. allowing it to be identified and evaluated by TeleForm Reader. The bars and spaces represent characters that can be read by TeleForm or other devices. Application A Windows program. TeleForm Administration Guide • • • • 359 • • . object. Banding Dragging a cursor over a specific area. C • • 360 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . box-style fields. The clipboard holds information until another selection is cut or copied. The term is also used generically to refer to the choices in underline fields. May be part of an Entry Field or a Choice Field. Border A rectangle that encompasses an object and defines the object's perimeter on a form.e. it contains either a check-mark or an X. and storage value. Cluster Server A server that manages one or more instances of a server application. Each choice consists of a bubble. fill in. or “x”) Bubbles Circles that a user darkens to indicate a selection. TeleForm Enterprise 10. When selected. Click To quickly press and release the left mouse button. Cluster Aware Application An application that can detect and handle events from a Cluster Server. Choose To select an item or command by clicking on it or by using the appropriate key sequence. and response-style choice fields.Glossary Block Form ID A block at the top of a Traditional form that TeleForm reads to aid in identification. Cluster A system configuration where a single system resource (such as a database server) actually consists of more than one physical resource. Close To shut down a document or application window.0 and later is a Cluster Aware Application. Choice Field A data Entry Field that includes one or more choices. It can be selected or cleared. Check box A small square that is shown in a dialog box. Clipboard A temporary storage area for cut or copied text and graphics that can be pasted into another TeleForm form or another Windows application. display value and storage value) of a Choice Field. Choice Option One element (bubble. providing redundancy. Client Recipient of data in a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) conversation. a display value. check. Box-style Choice Field A Choice Field where the standard bubbles are replaced by small boxes that the user can mark (i. Constrained Print Field A data Entry Field that lets users hand print alphabetic or numeric characters with a specific appearance so that they can be interpreted by TeleForm. but it looks like this: Command A word or phrase. High availability does not imply continuous availability.D Cold link In DDE. usually found on a menu or a button. that you choose to carry out an action. It looks like this: Conversation Exchange of data between two applications using DDE protocol. A format in which TeleForm can save data for use in exporting to other applications. Cursor A visual marker that indicates the area in which you are working. with no lapse in service. Copy To put a copy of the selected text or item on the Windows clipboard that can be transferred it to another location. (a type of reference mark. crosshair. Continuous Availability This implies non-stop service. Cut To remove an item from a document and put it onto the clipboard. the cursor may be displayed as an arrow. Comb-style Print Field A data Entry Field that lets users hand print alphabetic or numeric characters with a specific appearance.) CSV Comma Separated Values. Identical in nature to a Constrained Print Field. insertion bar. D TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 361 • • • . Cornerstone Any of the four blocks automatically placed at the corners of a Traditional form that aid in alignment and interpretation of returned forms. Depending on the function. or other shape. and is generally used to indicate a high level of availability in which only a very small quantity of downtime is allowed. a conversation in which the client only receives data from the server when the client requests it. This represents an ideal state. Directory A collection of files and subdirectories that are stored at the same location on a disk. but cannot be identified or evaluated by Reader. printer settings. A format in which TeleForm can save data for use in exporting to other applications.Glossary • • 362 •• • • Data Information maintained in individual fields and records. Data Group A type of group that can be applied to multiple data entry fields to combine their values into a single field value. choice fields. Data Entry Field A form element provided by TeleForm which users darken or otherwise use to enter printed information. Dialog box A box that opens in response to a command that allows you to control or configure an element of TeleForm. Drag To hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. Device Driver A file that tells your computer how to operate a peripheral device such as a mouse or printer. Detail Group A type of group that can be used to instantly create data tables and similar multi-row field structures from a single field or group of fields. Double-click To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession. TeleForm Administration Guide . DDE Dynamic Data Exchange. and so on. Defaults Predefined TeleForm settings such as confidence threshold. It can also export date values to databases that can accept such information. DCX A graphical image file format that supports multipage PCX files. Document window A window in an application where a file can be viewed and edited. Data entered into each row are stored as a records of the detail group field. Draft forms can be printed and distributed. Date Field The date field is a TeleForm object capable of performing date validations on your form. A windows communication interface that allows windows applications to exchange data. and Image Zones. Data Entry Field types include constrained print fields. entry fields. Draft A form that has not been activated. DEL Delimited values. Explicit ID field A field that is added to Existing forms to uniquely identify the form to TeleForm. memory. Exclude zones are generally used to prevent the interpretation of text inside a recognition area. such as pre-filled text inside an Image Zone. E F TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 363 • • • . Entry Field A data Entry Field consisting of any number of bubbles with corresponding single character data storage values. Export To copy a form or form data from the hard disk to another directory or disk. the service is started by the HA system on another component in the system. and is characterized by redundancy in hardware. Failover When a component in an HA system fails resulting in a loss of service. Exporting data requires selecting an export format so the data can be used by another application. Drop ink is a special colored ink that is invisible to your scanner. Edit To add. so there is no risk of removing parts of characters that overlap field lines. High availability does not imply fault tolerance. Exclude zones can be drawn onto forms using the Exclude Zone tool in TeleForm Designer. Can also be a reference to a data element in a database file. TeleForm Reader does not need to perform line removal. or delete text and/or graphics. change. Fault tolerance This is a means to achieve very high levels of availability.E Dropout form A form that is professionally produced using drop out ink. and I/0 subsystems. Existing form A form that was initially created in some application besides TeleForm. A fault tolerant system has the ability to continue service despite a hardware or a software failure. This transfer of a service following a failure in the system is termed failover. When dropout forms are evaluated. These forms can be scanned into TeleForm Designer and overlaid with TeleForm data fields to enable recognition. Field A data gathering object that is filled out by the form user and read by TeleForm. Extension The last three characters in a file name following the period. including CPU. Exclude Zone An area of the form where no recognition occurs. For Traditional and VersiForms. Group (standard) A collection of objects that behave as one object. Each set has a unique name. Grid Vertical and horizontal guidelines whose spacing and measurement units can be defined as an aid to form design. and activated for a form in TeleForm Designer. Format The structure of a data file. the Form ID is a physical mark or set of numbers on the form itself. Form name The name of a TeleForm document. Form template The complete set of form properties that have been set. When a form is evaluated. this can be up to 30 characters and does not need to have an extension. File name The name of a file. VersiForm. Font The shape of a set of characters. Flat-file database A database in which all related information is contained in a single table. G H • • 364 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Highlighted items are displayed in a different color than normal items. Form A TeleForm document designed to gather data automatically. to prepare a disk so that it can hold information. Also. Form ID The unique identification number for a TeleForm form. In DOS and Windows.Glossary File A document or application that has been given a name. Highlighted Indicates that an object or text is selected. Specifies the type of database to which file data is exported. In TeleForm. followed by a period separator and one to three extension characters to identify the file format. TeleForm Reader identifies the form and then references the form's template to obtain the evaluation and export instructions for the form. saved. file names are generally composed of one or more naming characters. File format The structure or arrangement of data stored in a file. such as Helvetica or Times Roman. whether Traditional. or Existing. Grab handles Small black squares that are shown on the edges and corners of an object when it is selected. Log A chart. a conversation in which the server sends data to the client whenever the data changes or becomes available. encrypted text) and/or images (e. Image Zone An area on a form that TeleForm reserves for capturing data (e. Icon A graphic representation for various elements.g. to enlarge a form on the screen to twice its actual size so that objects can be edited in detail. ICR An acronym for Intelligent Character Recognition. or table of events that have occurred. Machine Locking Tying TeleForm to a specific computer through the Activation Wizard. I L M TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 365 • • • . Import To copy a form or form data from another directory or disk. Library A TeleForm file in which frequently used objects and groups of objects can be stored. such as application programs. Multiple Detail tables can exist for each order table.g.I Hot link In DDE. It is displayed below the title bar. a drawing). a bar code. Master-detail A term used for forms that include Detail Groups. It defines the relationship between two data tables. The technology used to read and convert hand-printed text from a graphical image format to an editable text format. Insertion point Refers to the location of the cursor. Magnify In TeleForm. The place where text is inserted when you type. list. the detail table (or Line Item table) contains Detail Group records. Menu A list of commands that opens under each menu bar item. Menu bar The horizontal bar that contains the names of TeleForm menus. The master table (or Order table) contains the main records. TeleForm must be activated before it can run. and as such. but are available as backups in case of a failure at the active node. When the existing forms are filled out and evaluated. does not need to be activated or contain reference marks. Non-recognition form A form that is designed to not be interpreted by TeleForm. The technology used to read and convert machine-printed text from a graphical image format to an editable text format. The form status assigned to a document that is not recognized by TeleForm Reader as being a TeleForm form. Overlay field A TeleForm data field that is positioned directly over the background image on an existing form. Passive nodes are servers in the cluster that are not currently processing. Paste To transfer the contents of the clipboard to an application.Glossary N Node A server that is managed by the cluster server. NonForm 1. Option button A small round button that is displayed in a dialog box and is used to enable an option. In this way. overlay fields allow recognition to occur on existing forms. shapes. A form or page that is not a TeleForm document. Page link An element repeated on every page of a form that serves to link the pages (should they happen to get separated) when the form is returned. graphics. Object An item placed on a form that can be text. 2. Object ID A unique identifier assigned for form data entry fields (sometimes called a field name). or data entry fields. TeleForm interprets the text and marks as part of the overlay field and processes it accordingly. The active node is the server in a cluster that is currently performing all processing tasks. O P • • 366 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Open To display the contents of a form in a window or to enlarge an icon to a window. OCR Optical Character Recognition. PCX A file format for storing one page images in the form of a rectangular bitmap. forms held for verification may be stored in TELEFORM\SUS. TeleForm can store Image Zones as PCX files. A raster font is used mostly on the screen. Point size A unit of measure for text. Pixels The smallest graphic units on the display screen. R TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 367 • • • . Information held in RAM is lost when you turn off your computer. Recoflex A software utility built into TeleForm that combines the interpretation results of several recognition engines and applies complex algorithms and artificial intelligence routines to determine which result is the most accurate. It is available only in a fixed size and is not scalable. The allowable range is 0-255. It can be read from or written to by the computer or other devices. Proportional font A font in which different characters have varying widths. A point is equal to 1/72 of an inch. 255 is the lowest priority. Raster font A font created as a graphic bitmap image. Recognition set The currently active set of forms that TeleForm Reader is able to recognize and process. Record A horizontal row in a database that contains a group of related fields of data. 0 is the highest priority. with the default being 100. Pointer An arrow-shaped cursor that indicates the mouse position. but is also used by some dot-matrix printers and built into some laser printers. Used in TeleForm to move objects. For example. Preprocessing The process of enhancing an image as it is processed by TeleForm Reader. RAM An acronym for Random Access Memory. PDF-417 A set of high density 2 dimensional bar code symbology. Priority You can set varying priorities for batches and Connect Agents. This process applies various filters to the image to increase its clarity and remove unwanted lines and noise before it is evaluated.R Path The location of a file in a directory tree. Glossary Reference marks The alignment marks that are automatically placed on a Traditional or VersiForm form and aid in its interpretation (for Traditional forms they are also called cornerstones). and transaction processing. Save To store a file or document on a disk using the Save or Save As commands. data manipulation. Scroll arrow An arrow at either end of the scroll bar that helps you scroll through information. and other such marks. Script A short program or routine that can be used by a program to enhance its function or provide additional capability. Click on the scroll arrow to advance by one line. Right-click To quickly press and release the right mouse button. Relational database As opposed to a flat-file database system. SQL Structured Query Language. See “Master-detail” on page 365. a relational database can store related information across a number of tables. Select To highlight an object or a menu command by clicking on it. in which all related information is contained in a single table. SQL includes programming commands for data definition. Adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as the standard language for relational database management systems (RDBMS). or press the mouse button to scroll continuously. and can create relationships between tables based on common data. Scroll bars The bars that display at the bottom and right edge of a window when the contents of the window are not entirely visible. Response field A special class of Choice Field where users circle the desired option rather than fill in a bubble field. S • • 368 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Server Source of data in a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) conversation. Response mark The portion of an Entry Field or a Choice Field that a user darkens in order to indicate the desired value. squares. Scaled point size A point size that approximates a specified point size for use on the screen. data retrieval. Resource An application or service managed by the cluster server. security. Can be bubbles. TeleForm Monitor The TeleForm utility that monitors the status of every workstation. and year (2/2/2). TeleForm Control Center A snap-in for Microsoft Management Console (MMC) that allows you to manage your TeleForm network. copied. TeleForm Database Utilities The TeleForm utilities that allow you to optimize and maintain your database files. such as commas. Status bar A bar that displays underneath certain TeleForm windows that provides information about the items in the window. and pasted as a single object. Although forms can be received when this application is closed. TeleForm Verifier The TeleForm application where returned forms that contain suspect data are corrected. TeleForm Remote Capture Station The TeleForm application that allows forms and documents to be captured remotely. TeleForm Designer The TeleForm application where all forms are created and managed. TeleForm form Any form created in TeleForm Designer that can be evaluated by TeleForm Reader. and slashes. Template A layout for data entry fields that includes fields and separator characters. TeleForm Scan Station The TeleForm application that turns completed forms into batches that can be processed by Reader and Verifier. day. hyphens. TeleForm License Manager The TeleForm utility where your registration code and license codes are managed. Often useful to retain the spacing between fields during form design. TeleForm Reader The TeleForm application responsible for interpreting forms. For example. TeleForm Viewer The TeleForm utility for viewing forms and images. TeleForm Stats The TeleForm application that collects statistics for workflow analysis. then transferred to the main TeleForm system for evaluation. T TeleForm Administration Guide • • • 369 • • • . Forms can also be filled in by keyboard from Verifier. cut. a date format may include slashes to separate month. they cannot be interpreted unless TeleForm Reader is running.T Standard group A collection of objects that can be moved. U V W • • 370 •• • • Warm link In DDE. Text cursor The text cursor is shown whenever the insertion point is in a text field.Glossary Text Any characters entered on a form or data Entry Field that are not treated numerically. Upon notification. Traditional form A form created entirely in TeleForm Designer. containing the cornerstone reference marks and visible User ID. the client may request to have the actual data sent to it. usually a form name. A graphical file format commonly used for fax transmissions. TIF Tagged Image File format. or “x”) User ID A name associated with a form that identifies the person to whom it was sent. containing the flexible reference marks and text or bar code Form ID. Underline-style Choice Field A Choice Field where the bubbles are replaced by underscores where the user can draw a mark (check. and minimized. Title bar The horizontal bar at the top of a window containing the title of the window. Window A rectangular area on the computer screen in which an application is run. Topic Name of the topic of a DDE conversation. maximized. TeleForm Administration Guide . a conversation in which the client is notified each time the data changes at the server (at least data which is relevant to the conversation). therefore identifying who returned the form. such as when editing a text object. Windows can generally be manually resized. VersiForm A form created in TeleForm Designer. 313 TeleForm Administration Guide Batch 310 Batch # 312 Batch date 312 Comment 313 Committed 312 Data review 312 Directory 313 Eval 310 Eval OK 310. 311.Net 2. 312 Tracking ID 311. 313 Owner 311. 288 By Form tab 281 • • • 371 • • • .0 186 A Activated forms 277 Changing 278 Active Directory 46. 312 Pages evaluated 313 Pages evaluated OK 313 Pages scanned 313 Priority 311. 311 Forms evaluated OK 313 Forms scanned 313 Job 311. 312 Job QC 312 Need eval 312 Need review 310. 312 Type 312 Viewing 310 Workstation 312 Batches Purging 255 Best guess threshold 141 By Form chart 282. 312. 313 Scan 310 Scan operator 312 Scan time 312 Status 311. 313 NonForm 310. 94 Advanced configuration 241 Alerts 236 AMP Service 224 Analyzing form design 277 Analyzing forms Application level 280 Analyzing system throughput 295 Application-specific statistics 301 Archiving images 256 Auto page link 136 Auto-assign queue refresh 153 Average Times chart 284 B Backlog statistic 301 Backup directory 123 Bad evaluations 248 Bad images 248 Batch commit 136 Batch merging 151 Batch page link 136 Batch statistics Attachment option 312 Bad images 312.NET 43 .Index Symbols . Index C Cache the auto-assign queue 153 Capture Mode 306 Character extraction tolerance 142 Character Mode 215.RES file 153 Concurrent Users 181 Confidence settings 137 Confidence threshold 141 Configuration Options dialog box 118. 309. 315 Current Workload folder 287. 340 Configuration Options tab 243 Batch auto assign skip flags 162 Capture Zone entry font name 164 Clear and key virtuals 163 Disable background form loads 163 Enable scripts 163 Explicit ID performance 163 Form selection config override 164 Generate wallpaper resolution 164 Right justify numerics 164 Stacked config pages 164 Verifier preloads 164 Configuration settings Verifier configuration 204 • • 372 •• • • Configuring global settings 241 Configuring station settings 242 Configuring user settings 243 Connect Agent setup 174.Advanced tab 132 Copy bitmaps to clipboard with Edit/Copy 132 Default shape library 133 Extended ID range 133 Form ID assignment 133 TeleForm Administration Guide . 311 D Default language 119 Designer . 191 Connect Agents 50 Constrained print fill threshold 141 Control Center Action menu 229 Alerts 236 Alerts branch 228 Analyzing form design 277 Analyzing system throughput 295 Configuration Settings branch 228 Current Workload branch 228 Customizing 229 Email alerts 237 Form correction summary report 290 Form detail report 292 Generating form reports 289 Global settings 241 Readers 280 Reports branch 228 Resolving inefficiency 245 System branch 228 System throughput reports 313 Verifiers 280 Control Center branches 228 Correction options Character Mode 215 Field Mode 213 Form Mode 209 Verifier 206 Crystal reports 289. 307 Appearance tab 217 Best guess character display options 217 Exclude confusable characters 215 Exclude if confidence is less than 216 Exclude Image Zones 216 General Options tab 215 Number of columns and rows to display 215 Number of corrected characters to display 215 Number of uncorrected characters to display 215 Setting colors 217 Sorting 216 Statistics 308 Character recognition options 141 Choice field separator 125 Citrix system requirements 80 Collect Reader statistics 148 Collect Verifier statistics 121 Compress . 193 Evaluation zones 136 Evaluation/Identification 135 Existing/VersiForm confidence 137 Export Connect Agents 50 Export tab 124 Choice field separator 125 Export/Commit retries 124 Mapping fields 125 Maximum field name length 125 Minimum VARCHAR length 125 Strict commit rule 125 Export/Commit retries 124 TeleForm Administration Guide F Field character threshold 206 Field Mode 213.Defaults tab 133 Constrained print dimensions 134 Entry/Choice shape 134 Line width 134 Reference mark margins 134 Designer .Local tab 130 Create a New form at startup 130 Existing form background color 131 Show Form ID and state in title 131 Show full grid 131 Spell check language 131 Spell checking options 131 Sticky cursors 130 Designer tab 242 Diagnostic Logging 156 Directory connection 170 Disable audible alerts 129 Disable fax capabilities 129 Distribution 136 Dropin identification 139 DSS Files 168. 306 Appearance tab 214 Automatically skip to the next questionable character 214 Don’t allow incorrect entry 213 Exclude Image Zones 214 General Options tab 213 Number of fields to display 214 Operator statistics 306 Setting colors 214 FIPS 186 Firewall 185 Form cache size 129 Form correction statistics 291 Form correction summary 290 Form detail report 292 Form detail statistics 292 Form evaluation statistics 289 Form merges 241 Form Mode 209.E Maximum undos 133 Skip ’Save As’ dialog for activated forms 132 Standard ID range 133 Validate files at next startup 132 Designer . 305. 304 Always prompt before leaving 211 Appearance tab 211 Automatically move to the next character needing review 210 Correction Options tab 210 Default image scaling 212 Don’t allow incorrect entry 210 Don’t prompt to save data after each form 210 Image Positioning tab 212 Image Zone font size 211 Leave after all fields visited 210 Leave after tabbing out of last field 211 Leave when user presses enter 211 Setting colors 211 Skip empty Image Zones 210 Form statistics 279 Application level 280 Average time to verify 284 Form reports 289 Total Times chart 288 • • • 373 • • • . 181 E Email alerts 237 Enable script caching 153 Enable synchronization 173. 299 % Complete 300 % Need Verify 300 Avg.) 300 Backlog 299 Estimated completion 300 Forms 299 Images 299 License 298 NonForms 300 Stations running 300 Statistics collection 299 Time to complete 300 Workflow 298 Global System Export tab 124 General tab 119 • • 374 •• • • Image Storage tab 122 Read Only tab 125 Resource Checker tab 126 H Hardware requirements Server 42 Horizontal offset 138 Horizontal shrink 138 I IDOL 32 Image extraction tolerance 142 Image management options 206 Image preprocessing 241 Image Storage tab 122 Backup directory 123 Image Zone format 123 Internal storage format 122 JPEG compression quality 123 NonForm image directory 123 Save without processing 124 Image Zone fill threshold 142 Image Zone format 123 Installation 39. 49 Intelligent Classification Server 50 Internal storage format 122 Internet Information Server 43 J Job Configuration 241 JPEG compression quality 123 L LDAP 46 License codes 75 TeleForm Administration Guide .Index Verification 286 Workflow 283 Workload level 287 Form tracking 232 Full tracking 232 G General tab Collect Verifier statistics 121 Default language 119 Lock timeout 120 Minimal tracking 120 Stall time 120 WYSIWYG text options 120 Generating form reports 289 Global settings 241 Advanced configuration 241 Form merges 241 Image preprocessing 241 Job Configuration 241 Licenses 241 Purge Log 241 Reader settings 241 Recognition Set 241 Security 241 Global statistics 297. Time (Sec. 49 Network protocols 46 Network requirements 45 Permissions 47 Installing on your Server 39. 53 Mapping fields 125 Mark all forms for review 143 Mark fill adjustment 142 Mark fill high threshold 142 Mark fill low threshold 142 Mark fill maximum threshold 143 Mark size tolerance 143 Maximum enabled forms 138 Maximum field name length 125 Maximum users per batch 153 Merge/Print tab 243 Batch merging 151 Enable merges 150 Enable printing and sending 150 High speed merge 150 Priority based queuing 151 Minimal tracking 120. 232 Minimum VARCHAR length 125 Missing page batch commit 136 Missing page export 136 TeleForm Administration Guide Modules 224 Licensed 76 Multi-page form handling 145 N Network cabling 45 Network connection 170 Network protocols 46 Network requirements 45 Non-batch export 136 NonForm image directory 123 NonForm image handling 146 Attach to adjacent forms 146 Do not save 146 Print if not attached 147 Save adjacent pages together 146 Save each page separately 146 Save unattached 147 O OCR recognition 144 ODBC connection cache size 129 OMR recognition 142 Operating rights 47 Optimizing form design 278 Optimizing system performance 251 P Page link rule 145 All characters match.M License information 76 License Manager 76 License statistics 300 Licensed Modules 76 Licenses 241 Load engines at startup 136 Local System tab 242 Disable audible alerts 129 Disable fax capabilities 129 Form cache size 129 ODBC connection cache size 129 Location lattice 143 Lock timeout 120 Logging 156 Logging in 111 Logging off 112 Look-alike characters 217 Low confidence character 143 M Mapped Drive 55 Mapped Drives 47. evaluated OK 145 High confidence characters must match 145 Only link forms with page link and/or user ID fields 146 Only link pages that are in same image or scan 146 Print forms with missing pages 146 Password For TeleForm modules 112 Permissions Installation 47 • • • 375 • • • . best guess OK 145 All characters match. 252 Purging Batches 255 Image Zone files 257 Statistics 255 Stored images 255 R Read Only tab 125 Reader Service 224 Reader .Image Handling tab 144 NonForm image handling 146 Page link rule 145 Reader .Identification tab 137 Enable NCS style forms 139 Evaluate all forms as 140 Evaluate NonForms as 140 Existing/VersiForm confidence 137 Max reference marks per quadrant 139 Maximum enabled forms 138 Minimum bars (NCS style forms) 139 Offset 138 Reference mark tolerance 139 Shrink factor 138 Use dropin identification 139 Reader .Recognition tab 140 Best guess threshold 141 Character extraction tolerance 142 Character recognition 141 Confidence threshold 141 Constrained print fill threshold 141 Disable single line extraction 142 Image extraction tolerance 142 Image Zone fill threshold 142 Location lattice use 143 Low confidence character 143 Mark all forms for review 143 Mark fill adjustment 142 Mark fill high 142 Mark fill low 142 Mark fill maximum threshold 143 Mark size tolerance 143 OMR recognition 142 Skip blank constrained print fields and Image Zones 142 Reader chart 282 Reader Identification tab Check for flipped forms 139 Reader settings 241 Reader station statistics 301 Avg.General tab 148 Collect NonForm identification information 149 Collect Reader field statistics 148 Collect Reader statistics 148 Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate) 149 Evaluation override format 149 Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue 149 Reader .Local tab 135 Batch commit 136 Batch page link 136 Display all evaluation zones 136 Distribution 136 Evaluation/Identification 135 Load engines at startup 136 • • 376 •• • • Missing page batch commit 136 Missing page export 136 Non-batch export 136 Reader .Index Priority based queuing 151 Protocols 46 Purge Log 241. Time 302 Images 302 Need review 303 NonForm 303 Station 302 Reader statistics 280 Reader Status Evaluate 248 Idle 248 Stalled 248 Reader tab 243 Recognition Set 241 Remote Batch Directory 198 TeleForm Administration Guide .OCR Performance tab 144 Reader . 55 User settings 243 V Verifier Configuration settings 204 Correction options 206 • • • 377 • • • . 191 Remote settings 172 Resource Checker tab 126 Check every _ seconds 128 Disk level 128 Ignore 127 Memory level 128 Retry 128 Warn 127 Reviewing archived images 256 Revision Control 259– 276 Rights 47 S Security 85. 241 Changing module password 112 Logging in 111 Logging off 112 Security Groups 106 Adding users 110 Creating 108 Server Hardware requirements 42 Software requirements 42 Web 42 Services 224 Session Info 200 Settings Security 85 Single Reader per batch 153 Software requirements Server 42 Stall time 120 Station settings 242 Configuration Options tab 243 Designer tab 242 Local System tab 242 Merge/Print tab 243 Reader tab 243 Statistics For individual fields 328 TeleForm Administration Guide Purging 255 Reader statistics 234 Recommended settings 232 Verifier statistics 235 Status Active 247 Evaluate 248 Idle 247 Stalled 247 Strict commit rule 125 Synchronization 172 Synchronization Directory 198 System maintenance 251 System throughput Analyzing 295 Application level 301 Batch information 310. 54. 312 Batch level 308 Capture Mode information 307 Character mode 308 Field Mode 306 Global statistics 297 Reports 313 User information 303 Workflow 299 T TCP/IP 46 templates 34 Testing forms 278 Throughput statistics 296 Troubleshooting bad images 248 U UNC Path 47.S Remote batch directory 171 Remote batch setup 174. Index Customizing for Operators 203 Field Mode 305 Form Mode 304 Image management options 206 Keyboard options 207 Mode totals 303 Shortcut commands 207 Verifier charts 283 Verifier operator statistics 303 Verifier statistics 280. 47 Time to Complete 288 Workstation Limits 43 WYSIWYG text options 120 X XML templates 34 Z Zone Mode Statistics 307 W Web Capture Administration 189 Web Capture Server 185 Web Server 42 Workflow 298 Workflow tab 283 Workload statistics 287 Avg. 305 Mode % 305 Mode Time 305 Need review 287 Time to Complete 287 Total Time 305 User 304. 305 Forms (Other Modes) 305 Forms / hr. Time 288 Completed 288 Form 288 Need review 288 • • 378 •• • • TeleForm Administration Guide . Time 287 Chars (Char Mode) 304 Completed 286 Fields (Field Mode) 304 Form 286 Forms (Form Mode) 304. 305 Workflow 283 Zones Capture Mode) 304 Vertical offset 138 Vertical shrink 138 Viewing form statistics 281 VMWare 41. 286 Avg.
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.